diff options
| author | Jeff Garzik <jgarzik@pretzel.yyz.us> | 2005-06-26 23:38:58 -0400 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Jeff Garzik <jgarzik@pobox.com> | 2005-06-26 23:38:58 -0400 |
| commit | 5696c1944a33b4434a9a1ebb6383b906afd43a10 (patch) | |
| tree | 16fbe6ba431bcf949ee8645510b0c2fd39b5810f /Documentation | |
| parent | 66b04a80eea60cabf9d89fd34deb3234a740052f (diff) | |
| parent | 020f46a39eb7b99a575b9f4d105fce2b142acdf1 (diff) | |
| download | op-kernel-dev-5696c1944a33b4434a9a1ebb6383b906afd43a10.zip op-kernel-dev-5696c1944a33b4434a9a1ebb6383b906afd43a10.tar.gz | |
Merge /spare/repo/linux-2.6/
Diffstat (limited to 'Documentation')
105 files changed, 6084 insertions, 1467 deletions
diff --git a/Documentation/00-INDEX b/Documentation/00-INDEX index 8de8a01..f28a24e 100644 --- a/Documentation/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/00-INDEX @@ -138,6 +138,8 @@ java.txt - info on the in-kernel binary support for Java(tm). kbuild/ - directory with info about the kernel build process. +kdumpt.txt + - mini HowTo on getting the crash dump code to work. kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt - mini HowTo on generation and location of kernel documentation files. kernel-docs.txt diff --git a/Documentation/Changes b/Documentation/Changes index 57542bc..b376007 100644 --- a/Documentation/Changes +++ b/Documentation/Changes @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ o PPP 2.4.0 # pppd --version o isdn4k-utils 3.1pre1 # isdnctrl 2>&1|grep version o nfs-utils 1.0.5 # showmount --version o procps 3.2.0 # ps --version -o oprofile 0.5.3 # oprofiled --version +o oprofile 0.9 # oprofiled --version Kernel compilation ================== diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile b/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile index e69b3d2..fa3e29a 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ DOCBOOKS := wanbook.xml z8530book.xml mcabook.xml videobook.xml \ kernel-hacking.xml kernel-locking.xml deviceiobook.xml \ - procfs-guide.xml writing_usb_driver.xml scsidrivers.xml \ + procfs-guide.xml writing_usb_driver.xml \ sis900.xml kernel-api.xml journal-api.xml lsm.xml usb.xml \ gadget.xml libata.xml mtdnand.xml librs.xml @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ installmandocs: mandocs KERNELDOC = scripts/kernel-doc DOCPROC = scripts/basic/docproc -XMLTOFLAGS = -m Documentation/DocBook/stylesheet.xsl +XMLTOFLAGS = -m $(srctree)/Documentation/DocBook/stylesheet.xsl #XMLTOFLAGS += --skip-validation ### diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl index 757cef8..d650ce3 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl @@ -266,7 +266,7 @@ X!Ekernel/module.c <chapter id="hardware"> <title>Hardware Interfaces</title> <sect1><title>Interrupt Handling</title> -!Iarch/i386/kernel/irq.c +!Ikernel/irq/manage.c </sect1> <sect1><title>Resources Management</title> @@ -338,7 +338,6 @@ X!Earch/i386/kernel/mca.c X!Iinclude/linux/device.h --> !Edrivers/base/driver.c -!Edrivers/base/class_simple.c !Edrivers/base/core.c !Edrivers/base/firmware_class.c !Edrivers/base/transport_class.c diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/libata.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/libata.tmpl index cf2fce7..6df1dfd 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/libata.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/libata.tmpl @@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ </authorgroup> <copyright> - <year>2003</year> + <year>2003-2005</year> <holder>Jeff Garzik</holder> </copyright> @@ -44,30 +44,38 @@ <toc></toc> - <chapter id="libataThanks"> - <title>Thanks</title> + <chapter id="libataIntroduction"> + <title>Introduction</title> <para> - The bulk of the ATA knowledge comes thanks to long conversations with - Andre Hedrick (www.linux-ide.org). + libATA is a library used inside the Linux kernel to support ATA host + controllers and devices. libATA provides an ATA driver API, class + transports for ATA and ATAPI devices, and SCSI<->ATA translation + for ATA devices according to the T10 SAT specification. </para> <para> - Thanks to Alan Cox for pointing out similarities - between SATA and SCSI, and in general for motivation to hack on - libata. - </para> - <para> - libata's device detection - method, ata_pio_devchk, and in general all the early probing was - based on extensive study of Hale Landis's probe/reset code in his - ATADRVR driver (www.ata-atapi.com). + This Guide documents the libATA driver API, library functions, library + internals, and a couple sample ATA low-level drivers. </para> </chapter> <chapter id="libataDriverApi"> <title>libata Driver API</title> + <para> + struct ata_port_operations is defined for every low-level libata + hardware driver, and it controls how the low-level driver + interfaces with the ATA and SCSI layers. + </para> + <para> + FIS-based drivers will hook into the system with ->qc_prep() and + ->qc_issue() high-level hooks. Hardware which behaves in a manner + similar to PCI IDE hardware may utilize several generic helpers, + defining at a bare minimum the bus I/O addresses of the ATA shadow + register blocks. + </para> <sect1> <title>struct ata_port_operations</title> + <sect2><title>Disable ATA port</title> <programlisting> void (*port_disable) (struct ata_port *); </programlisting> @@ -78,6 +86,9 @@ void (*port_disable) (struct ata_port *); unplug). </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2><title>Post-IDENTIFY device configuration</title> <programlisting> void (*dev_config) (struct ata_port *, struct ata_device *); </programlisting> @@ -88,6 +99,9 @@ void (*dev_config) (struct ata_port *, struct ata_device *); issue of SET FEATURES - XFER MODE, and prior to operation. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2><title>Set PIO/DMA mode</title> <programlisting> void (*set_piomode) (struct ata_port *, struct ata_device *); void (*set_dmamode) (struct ata_port *, struct ata_device *); @@ -108,6 +122,9 @@ void (*post_set_mode) (struct ata_port *ap); ->set_dma_mode() is only called if DMA is possible. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2><title>Taskfile read/write</title> <programlisting> void (*tf_load) (struct ata_port *ap, struct ata_taskfile *tf); void (*tf_read) (struct ata_port *ap, struct ata_taskfile *tf); @@ -120,6 +137,9 @@ void (*tf_read) (struct ata_port *ap, struct ata_taskfile *tf); taskfile register values. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2><title>ATA command execute</title> <programlisting> void (*exec_command)(struct ata_port *ap, struct ata_taskfile *tf); </programlisting> @@ -129,17 +149,37 @@ void (*exec_command)(struct ata_port *ap, struct ata_taskfile *tf); ->tf_load(), to be initiated in hardware. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2><title>Per-cmd ATAPI DMA capabilities filter</title> + <programlisting> +int (*check_atapi_dma) (struct ata_queued_cmd *qc); + </programlisting> + + <para> +Allow low-level driver to filter ATA PACKET commands, returning a status +indicating whether or not it is OK to use DMA for the supplied PACKET +command. + </para> + + </sect2> + + <sect2><title>Read specific ATA shadow registers</title> <programlisting> u8 (*check_status)(struct ata_port *ap); -void (*dev_select)(struct ata_port *ap, unsigned int device); +u8 (*check_altstatus)(struct ata_port *ap); +u8 (*check_err)(struct ata_port *ap); </programlisting> <para> - Reads the Status ATA shadow register from hardware. On some - hardware, this has the side effect of clearing the interrupt - condition. + Reads the Status/AltStatus/Error ATA shadow register from + hardware. On some hardware, reading the Status register has + the side effect of clearing the interrupt condition. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2><title>Select ATA device on bus</title> <programlisting> void (*dev_select)(struct ata_port *ap, unsigned int device); </programlisting> @@ -147,9 +187,13 @@ void (*dev_select)(struct ata_port *ap, unsigned int device); <para> Issues the low-level hardware command(s) that causes one of N hardware devices to be considered 'selected' (active and - available for use) on the ATA bus. + available for use) on the ATA bus. This generally has no +meaning on FIS-based devices. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2><title>Reset ATA bus</title> <programlisting> void (*phy_reset) (struct ata_port *ap); </programlisting> @@ -162,17 +206,31 @@ void (*phy_reset) (struct ata_port *ap); functions ata_bus_reset() or sata_phy_reset() for this hook. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2><title>Control PCI IDE BMDMA engine</title> <programlisting> void (*bmdma_setup) (struct ata_queued_cmd *qc); void (*bmdma_start) (struct ata_queued_cmd *qc); +void (*bmdma_stop) (struct ata_port *ap); +u8 (*bmdma_status) (struct ata_port *ap); </programlisting> <para> - When setting up an IDE BMDMA transaction, these hooks arm - (->bmdma_setup) and fire (->bmdma_start) the hardware's DMA - engine. +When setting up an IDE BMDMA transaction, these hooks arm +(->bmdma_setup), fire (->bmdma_start), and halt (->bmdma_stop) +the hardware's DMA engine. ->bmdma_status is used to read the standard +PCI IDE DMA Status register. </para> + <para> +These hooks are typically either no-ops, or simply not implemented, in +FIS-based drivers. + </para> + + </sect2> + + <sect2><title>High-level taskfile hooks</title> <programlisting> void (*qc_prep) (struct ata_queued_cmd *qc); int (*qc_issue) (struct ata_queued_cmd *qc); @@ -190,20 +248,26 @@ int (*qc_issue) (struct ata_queued_cmd *qc); ->qc_issue is used to make a command active, once the hardware and S/G tables have been prepared. IDE BMDMA drivers use the helper function ata_qc_issue_prot() for taskfile protocol-based - dispatch. More advanced drivers roll their own ->qc_issue - implementation, using this as the "issue new ATA command to - hardware" hook. + dispatch. More advanced drivers implement their own ->qc_issue. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2><title>Timeout (error) handling</title> <programlisting> void (*eng_timeout) (struct ata_port *ap); </programlisting> <para> - This is a high level error handling function, called from the - error handling thread, when a command times out. +This is a high level error handling function, called from the +error handling thread, when a command times out. Most newer +hardware will implement its own error handling code here. IDE BMDMA +drivers may use the helper function ata_eng_timeout(). </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2><title>Hardware interrupt handling</title> <programlisting> irqreturn_t (*irq_handler)(int, void *, struct pt_regs *); void (*irq_clear) (struct ata_port *); @@ -216,6 +280,9 @@ void (*irq_clear) (struct ata_port *); is quiet. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2><title>SATA phy read/write</title> <programlisting> u32 (*scr_read) (struct ata_port *ap, unsigned int sc_reg); void (*scr_write) (struct ata_port *ap, unsigned int sc_reg, @@ -227,6 +294,9 @@ void (*scr_write) (struct ata_port *ap, unsigned int sc_reg, if ->phy_reset hook called the sata_phy_reset() helper function. </para> + </sect2> + + <sect2><title>Init and shutdown</title> <programlisting> int (*port_start) (struct ata_port *ap); void (*port_stop) (struct ata_port *ap); @@ -240,15 +310,17 @@ void (*host_stop) (struct ata_host_set *host_set); tasks. </para> <para> - ->host_stop() is called when the rmmod or hot unplug process - begins. The hook must stop all hardware interrupts, DMA - engines, etc. - </para> - <para> ->port_stop() is called after ->host_stop(). It's sole function is to release DMA/memory resources, now that they are no longer actively being used. </para> + <para> + ->host_stop() is called after all ->port_stop() calls +have completed. The hook must finalize hardware shutdown, release DMA +and other resources, etc. + </para> + + </sect2> </sect1> </chapter> @@ -279,4 +351,24 @@ void (*host_stop) (struct ata_host_set *host_set); !Idrivers/scsi/sata_sil.c </chapter> + <chapter id="libataThanks"> + <title>Thanks</title> + <para> + The bulk of the ATA knowledge comes thanks to long conversations with + Andre Hedrick (www.linux-ide.org), and long hours pondering the ATA + and SCSI specifications. + </para> + <para> + Thanks to Alan Cox for pointing out similarities + between SATA and SCSI, and in general for motivation to hack on + libata. + </para> + <para> + libata's device detection + method, ata_pio_devchk, and in general all the early probing was + based on extensive study of Hale Landis's probe/reset code in his + ATADRVR driver (www.ata-atapi.com). + </para> + </chapter> + </book> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/scsidrivers.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/scsidrivers.tmpl deleted file mode 100644 index d058e65..0000000 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/scsidrivers.tmpl +++ /dev/null @@ -1,193 +0,0 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> -<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN" - "http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.1.2/docbookx.dtd" []> - -<book id="scsidrivers"> - <bookinfo> - <title>SCSI Subsystem Interfaces</title> - - <authorgroup> - <author> - <firstname>Douglas</firstname> - <surname>Gilbert</surname> - <affiliation> - <address> - <email>dgilbert@interlog.com</email> - </address> - </affiliation> - </author> - </authorgroup> - <pubdate>2003-08-11</pubdate> - - <copyright> - <year>2002</year> - <year>2003</year> - <holder>Douglas Gilbert</holder> - </copyright> - - <legalnotice> - <para> - This documentation is free software; you can redistribute - it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public - License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either - version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later - version. - </para> - - <para> - This program is distributed in the hope that it will be - useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied - warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. - See the GNU General Public License for more details. - </para> - - <para> - You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public - License along with this program; if not, write to the Free - Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, - MA 02111-1307 USA - </para> - - <para> - For more details see the file COPYING in the source - distribution of Linux. - </para> - </legalnotice> - - </bookinfo> - -<toc></toc> - - <chapter id="intro"> - <title>Introduction</title> - <para> -This document outlines the interface between the Linux scsi mid level -and lower level drivers. Lower level drivers are variously called HBA -(host bus adapter) drivers, host drivers (HD) or pseudo adapter drivers. -The latter alludes to the fact that a lower level driver may be a -bridge to another IO subsystem (and the "ide-scsi" driver is an example -of this). There can be many lower level drivers active in a running -system, but only one per hardware type. For example, the aic7xxx driver -controls adaptec controllers based on the 7xxx chip series. Most lower -level drivers can control one or more scsi hosts (a.k.a. scsi initiators). - </para> -<para> -This document can been found in an ASCII text file in the linux kernel -source: <filename>Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt</filename> . -It currently hold a little more information than this document. The -<filename>drivers/scsi/hosts.h</filename> and <filename> -drivers/scsi/scsi.h</filename> headers contain descriptions of members -of important structures for the scsi subsystem. -</para> - </chapter> - - <chapter id="driver-struct"> - <title>Driver structure</title> - <para> -Traditionally a lower level driver for the scsi subsystem has been -at least two files in the drivers/scsi directory. For example, a -driver called "xyz" has a header file "xyz.h" and a source file -"xyz.c". [Actually there is no good reason why this couldn't all -be in one file.] Some drivers that have been ported to several operating -systems (e.g. aic7xxx which has separate files for generic and -OS-specific code) have more than two files. Such drivers tend to have -their own directory under the drivers/scsi directory. - </para> - <para> -scsi_module.c is normally included at the end of a lower -level driver. For it to work a declaration like this is needed before -it is included: -<programlisting> - static Scsi_Host_Template driver_template = DRIVER_TEMPLATE; - /* DRIVER_TEMPLATE should contain pointers to supported interface - functions. Scsi_Host_Template is defined hosts.h */ - #include "scsi_module.c" -</programlisting> - </para> - <para> -The scsi_module.c assumes the name "driver_template" is appropriately -defined. It contains 2 functions: -<orderedlist> -<listitem><para> - init_this_scsi_driver() called during builtin and module driver - initialization: invokes mid level's scsi_register_host() -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> - exit_this_scsi_driver() called during closedown: invokes - mid level's scsi_unregister_host() -</para></listitem> -</orderedlist> - </para> -<para> -When a new, lower level driver is being added to Linux, the following -files (all found in the drivers/scsi directory) will need some attention: -Makefile, Config.help and Config.in . It is probably best to look at what -an existing lower level driver does in this regard. -</para> - </chapter> - - <chapter id="intfunctions"> - <title>Interface Functions</title> -!EDocumentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt - </chapter> - - <chapter id="locks"> - <title>Locks</title> -<para> -Each Scsi_Host instance has a spin_lock called Scsi_Host::default_lock -which is initialized in scsi_register() [found in hosts.c]. Within the -same function the Scsi_Host::host_lock pointer is initialized to point -at default_lock with the scsi_assign_lock() function. Thereafter -lock and unlock operations performed by the mid level use the -Scsi_Host::host_lock pointer. -</para> -<para> -Lower level drivers can override the use of Scsi_Host::default_lock by -using scsi_assign_lock(). The earliest opportunity to do this would -be in the detect() function after it has invoked scsi_register(). It -could be replaced by a coarser grain lock (e.g. per driver) or a -lock of equal granularity (i.e. per host). Using finer grain locks -(e.g. per scsi device) may be possible by juggling locks in -queuecommand(). -</para> - </chapter> - - <chapter id="changes"> - <title>Changes since lk 2.4 series</title> -<para> -io_request_lock has been replaced by several finer grained locks. The lock -relevant to lower level drivers is Scsi_Host::host_lock and there is one -per scsi host. -</para> -<para> -The older error handling mechanism has been removed. This means the -lower level interface functions abort() and reset() have been removed. -</para> -<para> -In the 2.4 series the scsi subsystem configuration descriptions were -aggregated with the configuration descriptions from all other Linux -subsystems in the Documentation/Configure.help file. In the 2.5 series, -the scsi subsystem now has its own (much smaller) drivers/scsi/Config.help -file. -</para> - </chapter> - - <chapter id="credits"> - <title>Credits</title> -<para> -The following people have contributed to this document: -<orderedlist> -<listitem><para> -Mike Anderson <email>andmike@us.ibm.com</email> -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> -James Bottomley <email>James.Bottomley@steeleye.com</email> -</para></listitem> -<listitem><para> -Patrick Mansfield <email>patmans@us.ibm.com</email> -</para></listitem> -</orderedlist> -</para> - </chapter> - -</book> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/stylesheet.xsl b/Documentation/DocBook/stylesheet.xsl index e14c21d..64be9f7 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/stylesheet.xsl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/stylesheet.xsl @@ -2,4 +2,5 @@ <stylesheet xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/XSL/Transform" version="1.0"> <param name="chunk.quietly">1</param> <param name="funcsynopsis.style">ansi</param> +<param name="funcsynopsis.tabular.threshold">80</param> </stylesheet> diff --git a/Documentation/IPMI.txt b/Documentation/IPMI.txt index 90d10e7..84d3d4d 100644 --- a/Documentation/IPMI.txt +++ b/Documentation/IPMI.txt @@ -25,9 +25,10 @@ subject and I can't cover it all here! Configuration ------------- -The LinuxIPMI driver is modular, which means you have to pick several +The Linux IPMI driver is modular, which means you have to pick several things to have it work right depending on your hardware. Most of -these are available in the 'Character Devices' menu. +these are available in the 'Character Devices' menu then the IPMI +menu. No matter what, you must pick 'IPMI top-level message handler' to use IPMI. What you do beyond that depends on your needs and hardware. @@ -35,33 +36,30 @@ IPMI. What you do beyond that depends on your needs and hardware. The message handler does not provide any user-level interfaces. Kernel code (like the watchdog) can still use it. If you need access from userland, you need to select 'Device interface for IPMI' if you -want access through a device driver. Another interface is also -available, you may select 'IPMI sockets' in the 'Networking Support' -main menu. This provides a socket interface to IPMI. You may select -both of these at the same time, they will both work together. - -The driver interface depends on your hardware. If you have a board -with a standard interface (These will generally be either "KCS", -"SMIC", or "BT", consult your hardware manual), choose the 'IPMI SI -handler' option. A driver also exists for direct I2C access to the -IPMI management controller. Some boards support this, but it is -unknown if it will work on every board. For this, choose 'IPMI SMBus -handler', but be ready to try to do some figuring to see if it will -work. - -There is also a KCS-only driver interface supplied, but it is -depracated in favor of the SI interface. +want access through a device driver. + +The driver interface depends on your hardware. If your system +properly provides the SMBIOS info for IPMI, the driver will detect it +and just work. If you have a board with a standard interface (These +will generally be either "KCS", "SMIC", or "BT", consult your hardware +manual), choose the 'IPMI SI handler' option. A driver also exists +for direct I2C access to the IPMI management controller. Some boards +support this, but it is unknown if it will work on every board. For +this, choose 'IPMI SMBus handler', but be ready to try to do some +figuring to see if it will work on your system if the SMBIOS/APCI +information is wrong or not present. It is fairly safe to have both +these enabled and let the drivers auto-detect what is present. You should generally enable ACPI on your system, as systems with IPMI -should have ACPI tables describing them. +can have ACPI tables describing them. If you have a standard interface and the board manufacturer has done their job correctly, the IPMI controller should be automatically -detect (via ACPI or SMBIOS tables) and should just work. Sadly, many -boards do not have this information. The driver attempts standard -defaults, but they may not work. If you fall into this situation, you -need to read the section below named 'The SI Driver' on how to -hand-configure your system. +detected (via ACPI or SMBIOS tables) and should just work. Sadly, +many boards do not have this information. The driver attempts +standard defaults, but they may not work. If you fall into this +situation, you need to read the section below named 'The SI Driver' or +"The SMBus Driver" on how to hand-configure your system. IPMI defines a standard watchdog timer. You can enable this with the 'IPMI Watchdog Timer' config option. If you compile the driver into @@ -73,6 +71,18 @@ closed (by default it is disabled on close). Go into the 'Watchdog Cards' menu, enable 'Watchdog Timer Support', and enable the option 'Disable watchdog shutdown on close'. +IPMI systems can often be powered off using IPMI commands. Select +'IPMI Poweroff' to do this. The driver will auto-detect if the system +can be powered off by IPMI. It is safe to enable this even if your +system doesn't support this option. This works on ATCA systems, the +Radisys CPI1 card, and any IPMI system that supports standard chassis +management commands. + +If you want the driver to put an event into the event log on a panic, +enable the 'Generate a panic event to all BMCs on a panic' option. If +you want the whole panic string put into the event log using OEM +events, enable the 'Generate OEM events containing the panic string' +option. Basic Design ------------ @@ -80,7 +90,7 @@ Basic Design The Linux IPMI driver is designed to be very modular and flexible, you only need to take the pieces you need and you can use it in many different ways. Because of that, it's broken into many chunks of -code. These chunks are: +code. These chunks (by module name) are: ipmi_msghandler - This is the central piece of software for the IPMI system. It handles all messages, message timing, and responses. The @@ -93,18 +103,26 @@ ipmi_devintf - This provides a userland IOCTL interface for the IPMI driver, each open file for this device ties in to the message handler as an IPMI user. -ipmi_si - A driver for various system interfaces. This supports -KCS, SMIC, and may support BT in the future. Unless you have your own -custom interface, you probably need to use this. +ipmi_si - A driver for various system interfaces. This supports KCS, +SMIC, and BT interfaces. Unless you have an SMBus interface or your +own custom interface, you probably need to use this. ipmi_smb - A driver for accessing BMCs on the SMBus. It uses the I2C kernel driver's SMBus interfaces to send and receive IPMI messages over the SMBus. -af_ipmi - A network socket interface to IPMI. This doesn't take up -a character device in your system. +ipmi_watchdog - IPMI requires systems to have a very capable watchdog +timer. This driver implements the standard Linux watchdog timer +interface on top of the IPMI message handler. + +ipmi_poweroff - Some systems support the ability to be turned off via +IPMI commands. -Note that the KCS-only interface ahs been removed. +These are all individually selectable via configuration options. + +Note that the KCS-only interface has been removed. The af_ipmi driver +is no longer supported and has been removed because it was impossible +to do 32 bit emulation on 64-bit kernels with it. Much documentation for the interface is in the include files. The IPMI include files are: @@ -424,7 +442,7 @@ at module load time (for a module) with: modprobe ipmi_smb.o addr=<adapter1>,<i2caddr1>[,<adapter2>,<i2caddr2>[,...]] dbg=<flags1>,<flags2>... - [defaultprobe=0] [dbg_probe=1] + [defaultprobe=1] [dbg_probe=1] The addresses are specified in pairs, the first is the adapter ID and the second is the I2C address on that adapter. @@ -532,3 +550,67 @@ Once you open the watchdog timer, you must write a 'V' character to the device to close it, or the timer will not stop. This is a new semantic for the driver, but makes it consistent with the rest of the watchdog drivers in Linux. + + +Panic Timeouts +-------------- + +The OpenIPMI driver supports the ability to put semi-custom and custom +events in the system event log if a panic occurs. if you enable the +'Generate a panic event to all BMCs on a panic' option, you will get +one event on a panic in a standard IPMI event format. If you enable +the 'Generate OEM events containing the panic string' option, you will +also get a bunch of OEM events holding the panic string. + + +The field settings of the events are: +* Generator ID: 0x21 (kernel) +* EvM Rev: 0x03 (this event is formatting in IPMI 1.0 format) +* Sensor Type: 0x20 (OS critical stop sensor) +* Sensor #: The first byte of the panic string (0 if no panic string) +* Event Dir | Event Type: 0x6f (Assertion, sensor-specific event info) +* Event Data 1: 0xa1 (Runtime stop in OEM bytes 2 and 3) +* Event data 2: second byte of panic string +* Event data 3: third byte of panic string +See the IPMI spec for the details of the event layout. This event is +always sent to the local management controller. It will handle routing +the message to the right place + +Other OEM events have the following format: +Record ID (bytes 0-1): Set by the SEL. +Record type (byte 2): 0xf0 (OEM non-timestamped) +byte 3: The slave address of the card saving the panic +byte 4: A sequence number (starting at zero) +The rest of the bytes (11 bytes) are the panic string. If the panic string +is longer than 11 bytes, multiple messages will be sent with increasing +sequence numbers. + +Because you cannot send OEM events using the standard interface, this +function will attempt to find an SEL and add the events there. It +will first query the capabilities of the local management controller. +If it has an SEL, then they will be stored in the SEL of the local +management controller. If not, and the local management controller is +an event generator, the event receiver from the local management +controller will be queried and the events sent to the SEL on that +device. Otherwise, the events go nowhere since there is nowhere to +send them. + + +Poweroff +-------- + +If the poweroff capability is selected, the IPMI driver will install +a shutdown function into the standard poweroff function pointer. This +is in the ipmi_poweroff module. When the system requests a powerdown, +it will send the proper IPMI commands to do this. This is supported on +several platforms. + +There is a module parameter named "poweroff_control" that may either be zero +(do a power down) or 2 (do a power cycle, power the system off, then power +it on in a few seconds). Setting ipmi_poweroff.poweroff_control=x will do +the same thing on the kernel command line. The parameter is also available +via the proc filesystem in /proc/ipmi/poweroff_control. Note that if the +system does not support power cycling, it will always to the power off. + +Note that if you have ACPI enabled, the system will prefer using ACPI to +power off. diff --git a/Documentation/SubmittingPatches b/Documentation/SubmittingPatches index 9838d32..4d1f41b 100644 --- a/Documentation/SubmittingPatches +++ b/Documentation/SubmittingPatches @@ -132,21 +132,6 @@ which require discussion or do not have a clear advantage should usually be sent first to linux-kernel. Only after the patch is discussed should the patch then be submitted to Linus. -For small patches you may want to CC the Trivial Patch Monkey -trivial@rustcorp.com.au set up by Rusty Russell; which collects "trivial" -patches. Trivial patches must qualify for one of the following rules: - Spelling fixes in documentation - Spelling fixes which could break grep(1). - Warning fixes (cluttering with useless warnings is bad) - Compilation fixes (only if they are actually correct) - Runtime fixes (only if they actually fix things) - Removing use of deprecated functions/macros (eg. check_region). - Contact detail and documentation fixes - Non-portable code replaced by portable code (even in arch-specific, - since people copy, as long as it's trivial) - Any fix by the author/maintainer of the file. (ie. patch monkey - in re-transmission mode) - 5) Select your CC (e-mail carbon copy) list. @@ -271,7 +256,7 @@ patch, which certifies that you wrote it or otherwise have the right to pass it on as a open-source patch. The rules are pretty simple: if you can certify the below: - Developer's Certificate of Origin 1.0 + Developer's Certificate of Origin 1.1 By making a contribution to this project, I certify that: @@ -291,9 +276,15 @@ can certify the below: person who certified (a), (b) or (c) and I have not modified it. + (d) I understand and agree that this project and the contribution + are public and that a record of the contribution (including all + personal information I submit with it, including my sign-off) is + maintained indefinitely and may be redistributed consistent with + this project or the open source license(s) involved. + then you just add a line saying - Signed-off-by: Random J Developer <random@developer.org> + Signed-off-by: Random J Developer <random@developer.example.org> Some people also put extra tags at the end. They'll just be ignored for now, but you can do this to mark internal company procedures or just diff --git a/Documentation/basic_profiling.txt b/Documentation/basic_profiling.txt index 65e3dc2..8764e9f 100644 --- a/Documentation/basic_profiling.txt +++ b/Documentation/basic_profiling.txt @@ -27,9 +27,13 @@ dump output readprofile -m /boot/System.map > captured_profile Oprofile -------- -Get the source (I use 0.8) from http://oprofile.sourceforge.net/ -and add "idle=poll" to the kernel command line + +Get the source (see Changes for required version) from +http://oprofile.sourceforge.net/ and add "idle=poll" to the kernel command +line. + Configure with CONFIG_PROFILING=y and CONFIG_OPROFILE=y & reboot on new kernel + ./configure --with-kernel-support make install @@ -46,7 +50,7 @@ start opcontrol --start stop opcontrol --stop dump output opreport > output_file -To only report on the kernel, run opreport /boot/vmlinux > output_file +To only report on the kernel, run opreport -l /boot/vmlinux > output_file A reset is needed to clear old statistics, which survive a reboot. diff --git a/Documentation/cdrom/sbpcd b/Documentation/cdrom/sbpcd index d1825df..b3ba63f 100644 --- a/Documentation/cdrom/sbpcd +++ b/Documentation/cdrom/sbpcd @@ -419,6 +419,7 @@ into the file "track01": */ #include <stdio.h> #include <sys/ioctl.h> +#include <sys/types.h> #include <linux/cdrom.h> static struct cdrom_tochdr hdr; @@ -429,7 +430,7 @@ static int datafile, drive; static int i, j, limit, track, err; static char filename[32]; -main(int argc, char *argv[]) +int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { /* * open /dev/cdrom @@ -516,6 +517,7 @@ entry[track+1].cdte_addr.lba=entry[track].cdte_addr.lba+300; } arg.addr.lba++; } + return 0; } /*===================== end program ========================================*/ @@ -564,15 +566,16 @@ Appendix -- the "cdtester" utility: #include <stdio.h> #include <malloc.h> #include <sys/ioctl.h> +#include <sys/types.h> #include <linux/cdrom.h> #ifdef AZT_PRIVATE_IOCTLS #include <linux/../../drivers/cdrom/aztcd.h> -#endif AZT_PRIVATE_IOCTLS +#endif /* AZT_PRIVATE_IOCTLS */ #ifdef SBP_PRIVATE_IOCTLS #include <linux/../../drivers/cdrom/sbpcd.h> #include <linux/fs.h> -#endif SBP_PRIVATE_IOCTLS +#endif /* SBP_PRIVATE_IOCTLS */ struct cdrom_tochdr hdr; struct cdrom_tochdr tocHdr; @@ -590,7 +593,7 @@ union struct cdrom_msf msf; unsigned char buf[CD_FRAMESIZE_RAW]; } azt; -#endif AZT_PRIVATE_IOCTLS +#endif /* AZT_PRIVATE_IOCTLS */ int i, i1, i2, i3, j, k; unsigned char sequence=0; unsigned char command[80]; @@ -738,7 +741,7 @@ void display(int size,unsigned char *buffer) } } -main(int argc, char *argv[]) +int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { printf("\nTesting tool for a CDROM driver's audio functions V0.1\n"); printf("(C) 1995 Eberhard Moenkeberg <emoenke@gwdg.de>\n"); @@ -1046,12 +1049,13 @@ main(int argc, char *argv[]) rc=ioctl(drive,CDROMAUDIOBUFSIZ,j); printf("%d frames granted.\n",rc); break; -#endif SBP_PRIVATE_IOCTLS +#endif /* SBP_PRIVATE_IOCTLS */ default: printf("unknown command: \"%s\".\n",command); break; } } + return 0; } /*==========================================================================*/ diff --git a/Documentation/cpu-freq/cpufreq-stats.txt b/Documentation/cpu-freq/cpufreq-stats.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e2d1e76 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/cpu-freq/cpufreq-stats.txt @@ -0,0 +1,128 @@ + + CPU frequency and voltage scaling statictics in the Linux(TM) kernel + + + L i n u x c p u f r e q - s t a t s d r i v e r + + - information for users - + + + Venkatesh Pallipadi <venkatesh.pallipadi@intel.com> + +Contents +1. Introduction +2. Statistics Provided (with example) +3. Configuring cpufreq-stats + + +1. Introduction + +cpufreq-stats is a driver that provices CPU frequency statistics for each CPU. +This statistics is provided in /sysfs as a bunch of read_only interfaces. This +interface (when configured) will appear in a seperate directory under cpufreq +in /sysfs (<sysfs root>/devices/system/cpu/cpuX/cpufreq/stats/) for each CPU. +Various statistics will form read_only files under this directory. + +This driver is designed to be independent of any particular cpufreq_driver +that may be running on your CPU. So, it will work with any cpufreq_driver. + + +2. Statistics Provided (with example) + +cpufreq stats provides following statistics (explained in detail below). +- time_in_state +- total_trans +- trans_table + +All the statistics will be from the time the stats driver has been inserted +to the time when a read of a particular statistic is done. Obviously, stats +driver will not have any information about the the frequcny transitions before +the stats driver insertion. + +-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- +<mysystem>:/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu0/cpufreq/stats # ls -l +total 0 +drwxr-xr-x 2 root root 0 May 14 16:06 . +drwxr-xr-x 3 root root 0 May 14 15:58 .. +-r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 14 16:06 time_in_state +-r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 14 16:06 total_trans +-r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 14 16:06 trans_table +-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +- time_in_state +This gives the amount of time spent in each of the frequencies supported by +this CPU. The cat output will have "<frequency> <time>" pair in each line, which +will mean this CPU spent <time> usertime units of time at <frequency>. Output +will have one line for each of the supported freuencies. usertime units here +is 10mS (similar to other time exported in /proc). + +-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- +<mysystem>:/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu0/cpufreq/stats # cat time_in_state +3600000 2089 +3400000 136 +3200000 34 +3000000 67 +2800000 172488 +-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +- total_trans +This gives the total number of frequency transitions on this CPU. The cat +output will have a single count which is the total number of frequency +transitions. + +-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- +<mysystem>:/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu0/cpufreq/stats # cat total_trans +20 +-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +- trans_table +This will give a fine grained information about all the CPU frequency +transitions. The cat output here is a two dimensional matrix, where an entry +<i,j> (row i, column j) represents the count of number of transitions from +Freq_i to Freq_j. Freq_i is in descending order with increasing rows and +Freq_j is in descending order with increasing columns. The output here also +contains the actual freq values for each row and column for better readability. + +-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- +<mysystem>:/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu0/cpufreq/stats # cat trans_table + From : To + : 3600000 3400000 3200000 3000000 2800000 + 3600000: 0 5 0 0 0 + 3400000: 4 0 2 0 0 + 3200000: 0 1 0 2 0 + 3000000: 0 0 1 0 3 + 2800000: 0 0 0 2 0 +-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +3. Configuring cpufreq-stats + +To configure cpufreq-stats in your kernel +Config Main Menu + Power management options (ACPI, APM) ---> + CPU Frequency scaling ---> + [*] CPU Frequency scaling + <*> CPU frequency translation statistics + [*] CPU frequency translation statistics details + + +"CPU Frequency scaling" (CONFIG_CPU_FREQ) should be enabled to configure +cpufreq-stats. + +"CPU frequency translation statistics" (CONFIG_CPU_FREQ_STAT) provides the +basic statistics which includes time_in_state and total_trans. + +"CPU frequency translation statistics details" (CONFIG_CPU_FREQ_STAT_DETAILS) +provides fine grained cpufreq stats by trans_table. The reason for having a +seperate config option for trans_table is: +- trans_table goes against the traditional /sysfs rule of one value per + interface. It provides a whole bunch of value in a 2 dimensional matrix + form. + +Once these two options are enabled and your CPU supports cpufrequency, you +will be able to see the CPU frequency statistics in /sysfs. + + + + diff --git a/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt b/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt index b85481a..933fae7 100644 --- a/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt +++ b/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt @@ -9,6 +9,7 @@ Dominik Brodowski <linux@brodo.de> + some additions and corrections by Nico Golde <nico@ngolde.de> @@ -25,6 +26,7 @@ Contents: 2.1 Performance 2.2 Powersave 2.3 Userspace +2.4 Ondemand 3. The Governor Interface in the CPUfreq Core @@ -86,7 +88,7 @@ highest frequency within the borders of scaling_min_freq and scaling_max_freq. -2.1 Powersave +2.2 Powersave ------------- The CPUfreq governor "powersave" sets the CPU statically to the @@ -94,7 +96,7 @@ lowest frequency within the borders of scaling_min_freq and scaling_max_freq. -2.2 Userspace +2.3 Userspace ------------- The CPUfreq governor "userspace" allows the user, or any userspace @@ -103,6 +105,14 @@ by making a sysfs file "scaling_setspeed" available in the CPU-device directory. +2.4 Ondemand +------------ + +The CPUfreq govenor "ondemand" sets the CPU depending on the +current usage. To do this the CPU must have the capability to +switch the frequency very fast. + + 3. The Governor Interface in the CPUfreq Core ============================================= diff --git a/Documentation/cpusets.txt b/Documentation/cpusets.txt index 2f8f24e..ad944c0 100644 --- a/Documentation/cpusets.txt +++ b/Documentation/cpusets.txt @@ -51,6 +51,14 @@ mems_allowed vector. If a cpuset is cpu or mem exclusive, no other cpuset, other than a direct ancestor or descendent, may share any of the same CPUs or Memory Nodes. +A cpuset that is cpu exclusive has a sched domain associated with it. +The sched domain consists of all cpus in the current cpuset that are not +part of any exclusive child cpusets. +This ensures that the scheduler load balacing code only balances +against the cpus that are in the sched domain as defined above and not +all of the cpus in the system. This removes any overhead due to +load balancing code trying to pull tasks outside of the cpu exclusive +cpuset only to be prevented by the tasks' cpus_allowed mask. User level code may create and destroy cpusets by name in the cpuset virtual file system, manage the attributes and permissions of these @@ -84,6 +92,9 @@ This can be especially valuable on: and a database), or * NUMA systems running large HPC applications with demanding performance characteristics. + * Also cpu_exclusive cpusets are useful for servers running orthogonal + workloads such as RT applications requiring low latency and HPC + applications that are throughput sensitive These subsets, or "soft partitions" must be able to be dynamically adjusted, as the job mix changes, without impacting other concurrently @@ -125,6 +136,8 @@ Cpusets extends these two mechanisms as follows: - A cpuset may be marked exclusive, which ensures that no other cpuset (except direct ancestors and descendents) may contain any overlapping CPUs or Memory Nodes. + Also a cpu_exclusive cpuset would be associated with a sched + domain. - You can list all the tasks (by pid) attached to any cpuset. The implementation of cpusets requires a few, simple hooks @@ -136,6 +149,9 @@ into the rest of the kernel, none in performance critical paths: allowed in that tasks cpuset. - in sched.c migrate_all_tasks(), to keep migrating tasks within the CPUs allowed by their cpuset, if possible. + - in sched.c, a new API partition_sched_domains for handling + sched domain changes associated with cpu_exclusive cpusets + and related changes in both sched.c and arch/ia64/kernel/domain.c - in the mbind and set_mempolicy system calls, to mask the requested Memory Nodes by what's allowed in that tasks cpuset. - in page_alloc, to restrict memory to allowed nodes. diff --git a/Documentation/devices.txt b/Documentation/devices.txt index bb67cf2..0f51517 100644 --- a/Documentation/devices.txt +++ b/Documentation/devices.txt @@ -94,6 +94,7 @@ Your cooperation is appreciated. 9 = /dev/urandom Faster, less secure random number gen. 10 = /dev/aio Asyncronous I/O notification interface 11 = /dev/kmsg Writes to this come out as printk's + 12 = /dev/oldmem Access to crash dump from kexec kernel 1 block RAM disk 0 = /dev/ram0 First RAM disk 1 = /dev/ram1 Second RAM disk diff --git a/Documentation/dontdiff b/Documentation/dontdiff index 9a33bb9..d4fda25 100644 --- a/Documentation/dontdiff +++ b/Documentation/dontdiff @@ -111,6 +111,7 @@ mkdep mktables modpost modversions.h* +offset.h offsets.h oui.c* parse.c* diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/device.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/device.txt index 58cc5dc..a05ec50 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-model/device.txt +++ b/Documentation/driver-model/device.txt @@ -76,6 +76,14 @@ driver_data: Driver-specific data. platform_data: Platform data specific to the device. + Example: for devices on custom boards, as typical of embedded + and SOC based hardware, Linux often uses platform_data to point + to board-specific structures describing devices and how they + are wired. That can include what ports are available, chip + variants, which GPIO pins act in what additional roles, and so + on. This shrinks the "Board Support Packages" (BSPs) and + minimizes board-specific #ifdefs in drivers. + current_state: Current power state of the device. saved_state: Pointer to saved state of the device. This is usable by diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/driver.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/driver.txt index 6031a68..fabaca1 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-model/driver.txt +++ b/Documentation/driver-model/driver.txt @@ -5,21 +5,17 @@ struct device_driver { char * name; struct bus_type * bus; - rwlock_t lock; - atomic_t refcount; - - list_t bus_list; + struct completion unloaded; + struct kobject kobj; list_t devices; - struct driver_dir_entry dir; + struct module *owner; int (*probe) (struct device * dev); int (*remove) (struct device * dev); int (*suspend) (struct device * dev, pm_message_t state, u32 level); int (*resume) (struct device * dev, u32 level); - - void (*release) (struct device_driver * drv); }; @@ -51,7 +47,6 @@ being converted completely to the new model. static struct device_driver eepro100_driver = { .name = "eepro100", .bus = &pci_bus_type, - .devclass = ðernet_devclass, /* when it's implemented */ .probe = eepro100_probe, .remove = eepro100_remove, @@ -85,7 +80,6 @@ static struct pci_driver eepro100_driver = { .driver = { .name = "eepro100", .bus = &pci_bus_type, - .devclass = ðernet_devclass, /* when it's implemented */ .probe = eepro100_probe, .remove = eepro100_remove, .suspend = eepro100_suspend, @@ -166,27 +160,32 @@ Callbacks int (*probe) (struct device * dev); -probe is called to verify the existence of a certain type of -hardware. This is called during the driver binding process, after the -bus has verified that the device ID of a device matches one of the -device IDs supported by the driver. - -This callback only verifies that there actually is supported hardware -present. It may allocate a driver-specific structure, but it should -not do any initialization of the hardware itself. The device-specific -structure may be stored in the device's driver_data field. - - int (*init) (struct device * dev); - -init is called during the binding stage. It is called after probe has -successfully returned and the device has been registered with its -class. It is responsible for initializing the hardware. +The probe() entry is called in task context, with the bus's rwsem locked +and the driver partially bound to the device. Drivers commonly use +container_of() to convert "dev" to a bus-specific type, both in probe() +and other routines. That type often provides device resource data, such +as pci_dev.resource[] or platform_device.resources, which is used in +addition to dev->platform_data to initialize the driver. + +This callback holds the driver-specific logic to bind the driver to a +given device. That includes verifying that the device is present, that +it's a version the driver can handle, that driver data structures can +be allocated and initialized, and that any hardware can be initialized. +Drivers often store a pointer to their state with dev_set_drvdata(). +When the driver has successfully bound itself to that device, then probe() +returns zero and the driver model code will finish its part of binding +the driver to that device. + +A driver's probe() may return a negative errno value to indicate that +the driver did not bind to this device, in which case it should have +released all reasources it allocated. int (*remove) (struct device * dev); -remove is called to dissociate a driver with a device. This may be +remove is called to unbind a driver from a device. This may be called if a device is physically removed from the system, if the -driver module is being unloaded, or during a reboot sequence. +driver module is being unloaded, during a reboot sequence, or +in other cases. It is up to the driver to determine if the device is present or not. It should free any resources allocated specifically for the diff --git a/Documentation/dvb/README.dibusb b/Documentation/dvb/README.dvb-usb index 7a9e958..c7ed01b 100644 --- a/Documentation/dvb/README.dibusb +++ b/Documentation/dvb/README.dvb-usb @@ -1,16 +1,40 @@ -Documentation for dib3000* frontend drivers and dibusb device driver -==================================================================== +Documentation for dvb-usb-framework module and its devices -Copyright (C) 2004-5 Patrick Boettcher (patrick.boettcher@desy.de), +Idea behind the dvb-usb-framework +================================= -dibusb and dib3000mb/mc drivers based on GPL code, which has +In March 2005 I got the new Twinhan USB2.0 DVB-T device. They provided specs and a firmware. -Copyright (C) 2004 Amaury Demol for DiBcom (ademol@dibcom.fr) +Quite keen I wanted to put the driver (with some quirks of course) into dibusb. +After reading some specs and doing some USB snooping, it realized, that the +dibusb-driver would be a complete mess afterwards. So I decided to do it in a +different way: With the help of a dvb-usb-framework. -This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or -modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as -published by the Free Software Foundation, version 2. +The framework provides generic functions (mostly kernel API calls), such as: +- Transport Stream URB handling in conjunction with dvb-demux-feed-control + (bulk and isoc (TODO) are supported) +- registering the device for the DVB-API +- registering an I2C-adapter if applicable +- remote-control/input-device handling +- firmware requesting and loading (currently just for the Cypress USB + controller) +- other functions/methods which can be shared by several drivers (such as + functions for bulk-control-commands) + +The source code of the particular DVB USB devices does just the communication +with the device via the bus. The connection between the DVB-API-functionality +is done via callbacks, assigned in a static device-description (struct +dvb_usb_device) each device-driver has to have. + +For an example have a look in drivers/media/dvb/dvb-usb/vp7045*. + +Objective is to migrate all the usb-devices (dibusb, cinergyT2, maybe the +ttusb; flexcop-usb already benefits from the generic flexcop-device) to use +the dvb-usb-lib. + +TODO: dynamic enabling and disabling of the pid-filter in regard to number of +feeds requested. Supported devices USB1.1 ======================== @@ -55,22 +79,34 @@ Others: - Grandtec USB DVB-T http://www.grand.com.tw/ -- Avermedia AverTV DVBT USB (2) +- AVerMedia AverTV DVBT USB http://www.avermedia.com/ - DiBcom USB DVB-T reference device (non-public) -Supported devices USB2.0 -======================== -- Twinhan MagicBox II (2) +Supported devices USB2.0-only +============================= +- Twinhan MagicBox II http://www.twinhan.com/product_terrestrial_7.asp -- Hanftek UMT-010 (1) +- TwinhanDTV Alpha + http://www.twinhan.com/product_terrestrial_8.asp + +- DigitalNow TinyUSB 2 DVB-t Receiver + http://www.digitalnow.com.au/DigitalNow%20tinyUSB2%20Specifications.html + +- Hanftek UMT-010 http://www.globalsources.com/si/6008819757082/ProductDetail/Digital-TV/product_id-100046529 -- Typhoon/Yakumo/HAMA DVB-T mobile USB2.0 (1) + +Supported devices USB2.0 and USB1.1 +============================= +- Typhoon/Yakumo/HAMA/Yuan DVB-T mobile USB2.0 http://www.yakumo.de/produkte/index.php?pid=1&ag=DVB-T + http://www.yuan.com.tw/en/products/vdo_ub300.html + http://www.hama.de/portal/articleId*114663/action*2563 + http://www.anubisline.com/english/articlec.asp?id=50502&catid=002 - Artec T1 USB TVBOX (FX2) (2) @@ -81,14 +117,24 @@ Supported devices USB2.0 - DiBcom USB2.0 DVB-T reference device (non-public) -1) It is working almost. +- AVerMedia AverTV A800 DVB-T USB2.0 + +1) It is working almost - work-in-progress. 2) No test reports received yet. +0. History & News: + 2005-04-17 - all dibusb devices ported to make use of the dvb-usb-framework + 2005-04-02 - re-enabled and improved remote control code. + 2005-03-31 - ported the Yakumo/Hama/Typhoon DVB-T USB2.0 device to dvb-usb. + 2005-03-30 - first commit of the dvb-usb-module based on the dibusb-source. First device is a new driver for the + TwinhanDTV Alpha / MagicBox II USB2.0-only DVB-T device. -0. NEWS: + (change from dvb-dibusb to dvb-usb) + 2005-03-28 - added support for the AVerMedia AverTV DVB-T USB2.0 device (Thanks to Glen Harris and Jiun-Kuei Jung, AVerMedia) + 2005-03-14 - added support for the Typhoon/Yakumo/HAMA DVB-T mobile USB2.0 2005-02-11 - added support for the KWorld/ADSTech Instant DVB-T USB2.0. Thanks a lot to Joachim von Caron 2005-02-02 - added support for the Hauppauge Win-TV Nova-T USB2 - 2005-01-31 - distorted streaming is finally gone for USB1.1 devices + 2005-01-31 - distorted streaming is gone for USB1.1 devices 2005-01-13 - moved the mirrored pid_filter_table back to dvb-dibusb - first almost working version for HanfTek UMT-010 - found out, that Yakumo/HAMA/Typhoon are predessors of the HanfTek UMT-010 @@ -99,7 +145,7 @@ Supported devices USB2.0 2004-12-26 - refactored the dibusb-driver, splitted into separate files - i2c-probing enabled 2004-12-06 - possibility for demod i2c-address probing - - new usb IDs (Compro,Artec) + - new usb IDs (Compro, Artec) 2004-11-23 - merged changes from DiB3000MC_ver2.1 - revised the debugging - possibility to deliver the complete TS for USB2.0 @@ -127,8 +173,8 @@ Supported devices USB2.0 CTS Portable (Chinese Television System) 2004-07-08 - firmware-extraction-2.422-problem solved, driver is now working properly with firmware extracted from 2.422 - - #if for 2.6.4 (dvb), compile issue - - changed firmware handling, see vp7041.txt sec 1.1 + - #if for 2.6.4 (dvb), compile issue + - changed firmware handling, see vp7041.txt sec 1.1 2004-07-02 - some tuner modifications, v0.1, cleanups, first public 2004-06-28 - now using the dvb_dmx_swfilter_packets, everything runs fine now @@ -139,38 +185,27 @@ Supported devices USB2.0 2004-05-11 - start writing the driver 1. How to use? -NOTE: This driver was developed using Linux 2.6.6., -it is working with 2.6.7 and above. - -Linux 2.4.x support is not planned, but patches are very welcome. - -NOTE: I'm using Debian testing, so the following explaination (especially -the hotplug-path) needn't match your system, but probably it will :). - -The driver is included in the kernel since Linux 2.6.10. - 1.1. Firmware -The USB driver needs to download a firmware to start working. - -You can either use "get_dvb_firmware dibusb" to download the firmware or you -can get it directly via +Most of the USB drivers need to download a firmware to start working. -for USB1.1 (AN2135) -http://www.linuxtv.org/downloads/firmware/dvb-dibusb-5.0.0.11.fw +for USB1.1 (AN2135) you need: dvb-usb-dibusb-5.0.0.11.fw +for USB2.0 HanfTek: dvb-usb-umt-010-02.fw +for USB2.0 DiBcom: dvb-usb-dibusb-6.0.0.8.fw +for USB2.0 AVerMedia AverTV DVB-T USB2: dvb-usb-avertv-a800-01.fw +for USB2.0 TwinhanDTV Alpha/MagicBox II: dvb-usb-vp7045-01.fw -for USB1.1 (AN2235) (a few Artec T1 devices) -http://www.linuxtv.org/downloads/firmware/dvb-dibusb-an2235-1.fw +The files can be found on http://www.linuxtv.org/download/firmware/ . -for USB2.0 (FX2) Hauppauge, DiBcom -http://www.linuxtv.org/downloads/firmware/dvb-dibusb-6.0.0.5.fw +We do not have the permission (yet) to publish the following firmware-files. +You'll need to extract them from the windows drivers. -for USB2.0 ADSTech/Kworld USB2.0 -http://www.linuxtv.org/downloads/firmware/dvb-dibusb-adstech-usb2-1.fw - -for USB2.0 HanfTek -http://www.linuxtv.org/downloads/firmware/dvb-dibusb-an2235-1.fw +You should be able to use "get_dvb_firmware dvb-usb" to get the firmware: +for USB1.1 (AN2235) (a few Artec T1 devices): dvb-usb-dibusb-an2235-01.fw +for USB2.0 Hauppauge: dvb-usb-nova-t-usb2-01.fw +for USB2.0 ADSTech/Kworld USB2.0: dvb-usb-adstech-usb2-01.fw +for USB2.0 Yakumo/Typhoon/Hama: dvb-usb-dtt200u-01.fw 1.2. Compiling @@ -178,6 +213,9 @@ Since the driver is in the linux kernel, activating the driver in your favorite config-environment should sufficient. I recommend to compile the driver as module. Hotplug does the rest. +If you use dvb-kernel enter the build-2.6 directory run 'make' and 'insmod.sh +load' afterwards. + 1.3. Loading the drivers Hotplug is able to load the driver, when it is needed (because you plugged @@ -188,15 +226,13 @@ from withing the dvb-kernel cvs repository. first have a look, which debug level are available: -modinfo dib3000mb -modinfo dib3000-common -modinfo dib3000mc -modinfo dvb-dibusb +modinfo dvb-usb +modinfo dvb-usb-vp7045 +etc. -modprobe dib3000-common debug=<level> -modprobe dib3000mb debug=<level> -modprobe dib3000mc debug=<level> -modprobe dvb-dibusb debug=<level> +modprobe dvb-usb debug=<level> +modprobe dvb-usb-vp7045 debug=<level> +etc. should do the trick. @@ -204,52 +240,32 @@ When the driver is loaded successfully, the firmware file was in the right place and the device is connected, the "Power"-LED should be turned on. -At this point you should be able to start a dvb-capable application. For myself -I used mplayer, dvbscan, tzap and kaxtv, they are working. Using the device -in vdr is working now also. +At this point you should be able to start a dvb-capable application. I'm use +(t|s)zap, mplayer and dvbscan to test the basics. VDR-xine provides the +long-term test scenario. 2. Known problems and bugs -- Don't remove the USB device while running an DVB application, your system will die. +- Don't remove the USB device while running an DVB application, your system + will go crazy or die most likely. 2.1. Adding support for devices -It is not possible to determine the range of devices based on the DiBcom -reference designs. This is because the reference design of DiBcom can be sold -to thirds, without telling DiBcom (so done with the Twinhan VP7041 and -the HAMA device). - -When you think you have a device like this and the driver does not recognizes it, -please send the ****load*.inf and the ****cap*.inf of the Windows driver to me. - -Sometimes the Vendor or Product ID is identical to the ones of Twinhan, even -though it is not a Twinhan device (e.g. HAMA), then please send me the name -of the device. I will add it to this list in order to make this clear to -others. - -If you are familar with C you can also add the VID and PID of the device to -the dvb-dibusb-core.c-file and create a patch and send it over to me or to -the linux-dvb mailing list, _after_ you have tried compiling and modprobing -it. +TODO 2.2. USB1.1 Bandwidth limitation -Most of the currently supported devices are USB1.1 and thus they have a +A lot of the currently supported devices are USB1.1 and thus they have a maximum bandwidth of about 5-6 MBit/s when connected to a USB2.0 hub. This is not enough for receiving the complete transport stream of a -DVB-T channel (which can be about 16 MBit/s). Normally this is not a +DVB-T channel (which is about 16 MBit/s). Normally this is not a problem, if you only want to watch TV (this does not apply for HDTV), but watching a channel while recording another channel on the same frequency simply does not work very well. This applies to all USB1.1 -DVB-T devices, not just dibusb) - -Update: For the USB1.1 and VDR some work has been done (patches and comments -are still very welcome). Maybe the problem is solved in the meantime because I -now use the dmx_sw_filter function instead of dmx_sw_filter_packet. I hope the -linux-dvb software filter is able to get the best of the garbled TS. +DVB-T devices, not just the dvb-usb-devices) The bug, where the TS is distorted by a heavy usage of the device is gone -definitely. All dibusb-devices I was using (Twinhan, Kworld, DiBcom) are +definitely. All dvb-usb-devices I was using (Twinhan, Kworld, DiBcom) are working like charm now with VDR. Sometimes I even was able to record a channel and watch another one. @@ -258,7 +274,7 @@ and watch another one. Patches, comments and suggestions are very very welcome. 3. Acknowledgements - Amaury Demol (ademol@dibcom.fr) and Francois Kanounnikoff from DiBcom for + Amaury Demol (ademol@dibcom.fr) and Francois Kanounnikoff from DiBcom for providing specs, code and help, on which the dvb-dibusb, dib3000mb and dib3000mc are based. @@ -270,9 +286,16 @@ Patches, comments and suggestions are very very welcome. Bernd Wagner for helping with huge bug reports and discussions. - Gunnar Wittich and Joachim von Caron for their trust for giving me + Gunnar Wittich and Joachim von Caron for their trust for providing root-shells on their machines to implement support for new devices. + Glen Harris for bringing up, that there is a new dibusb-device and Jiun-Kuei + Jung from AVerMedia who kindly provided a special firmware to get the device + up and running in Linux. + + Jennifer Chen, Jeff and Jack from Twinhan for kindly supporting by + writing the vp7045-driver. + Some guys on the linux-dvb mailing list for encouraging me Peter Schildmann >peter.schildmann-nospam-at-web.de< for his @@ -282,4 +305,4 @@ Patches, comments and suggestions are very very welcome. Ulf Hermenau for helping me out with traditional chinese. André Smoktun and Christian Frömmel for supporting me with - hardware and listening to my problems very patient + hardware and listening to my problems very patient. diff --git a/Documentation/dvb/bt8xx.txt b/Documentation/dvb/bt8xx.txt index d64430b..3a32607 100644 --- a/Documentation/dvb/bt8xx.txt +++ b/Documentation/dvb/bt8xx.txt @@ -44,26 +44,23 @@ TwinHan (dst) are loaded automatically by the dvb-bt8xx device driver. $ modprobe dst The value 0x71 will override the PCI type detection for dvb-bt8xx, -which is necessary for TwinHan cards. +which is necessary for TwinHan cards. If you're having an older card (blue color circuit) and card=0x71 locks your machine, try using 0x68, too. If that does not work, ask on the mailing list. -The DST module takes a couple of useful parameters. +The DST module takes a couple of useful parameters: -verbose takes values 0 to 5. These values control the verbosity level. - -debug takes values 0 and 1. You can either disable or enable debugging. - -dst_addons takes values 0 and 0x20. A value of 0 means it is a FTA card. -0x20 means it has a Conditional Access slot. - -The autodected values are determined bythe cards 'response -string' which you can see in your logs e.g. - -dst_get_device_id: Recognise [DSTMCI] +a. verbose takes values 0 to 5. These values control the verbosity level. +b. debug takes values 0 and 1. You can either disable or enable debugging. +c. dst_addons takes values 0 and 0x20: +- A value of 0 means it is a FTA card. +- A value of 0x20 means it has a Conditional Access slot. +The autodetected values are determined by the "response string" +of the card, which you can see in your logs: +e.g.: dst_get_device_id: Recognize [DSTMCI] -- -Authors: Richard Walker, Jamie Honan, Michael Hunold, Manu Abraham +Authors: Richard Walker, Jamie Honan, Michael Hunold, Manu Abraham, Uwe Bugla diff --git a/Documentation/fb/intelfb.txt b/Documentation/fb/intelfb.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c12d39a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/fb/intelfb.txt @@ -0,0 +1,135 @@ +Intel 830M/845G/852GM/855GM/865G/915G Framebuffer driver +================================================================ + +A. Introduction + This is a framebuffer driver for various Intel 810/815 compatible +graphics devices. These would include: + + Intel 830M + Intel 810E845G + Intel 852GM + Intel 855GM + Intel 865G + Intel 915G + +B. List of available options + + a. "video=intelfb" + enables the intelfb driver + + Recommendation: required + + b. "mode=<xres>x<yres>[-<bpp>][@<refresh>]" + select mode + + Recommendation: user preference + (default = 1024x768-32@70) + + c. "vram=<value>" + select amount of system RAM in MB to allocate for the video memory + if not enough RAM was already allocated by the BIOS. + + Recommendation: 1 - 4 MB. + (default = 4 MB) + + d. "voffset=<value>" + select at what offset in MB of the logical memory to allocate the + framebuffer memory. The intent is to avoid the memory blocks + used by standard graphics applications (XFree86). Depending on your + usage, adjust the value up or down, (0 for maximum usage, 63/127 MB + for the least amount). Note, an arbitrary setting may conflict + with XFree86. + + Recommendation: do not set + (default = 48 MB) + + e. "accel" + enable text acceleration. This can be enabled/reenabled anytime + by using 'fbset -accel true/false'. + + Recommendation: enable + (default = set) + + f. "hwcursor" + enable cursor acceleration. + + Recommendation: enable + (default = set) + + g. "mtrr" + enable MTRR. This allows data transfers to the framebuffer memory + to occur in bursts which can significantly increase performance. + Not very helpful with the intel chips because of 'shared memory'. + + Recommendation: set + (default = set) + + h. "fixed" + disable mode switching. + + Recommendation: do not set + (default = not set) + + The binary parameters can be unset with a "no" prefix, example "noaccel". + The default parameter (not named) is the mode. + +C. Kernel booting + +Separate each option/option-pair by commas (,) and the option from its value +with an equals sign (=) as in the following: + +video=i810fb:option1,option2=value2 + +Sample Usage +------------ + +In /etc/lilo.conf, add the line: + +append="video=intelfb:800x600-32@75,accel,hwcursor,vram=8" + +This will initialize the framebuffer to 800x600 at 32bpp and 75Hz. The +framebuffer will use 8 MB of System RAM. hw acceleration of text and cursor +will be enabled. + +D. Module options + + The module parameters are essentially similar to the kernel +parameters. The main difference is that you need to include a Boolean value +(1 for TRUE, and 0 for FALSE) for those options which don't need a value. + +Example, to enable MTRR, include "mtrr=1". + +Sample Usage +------------ + +Using the same setup as described above, load the module like this: + + modprobe intelfb mode=800x600-32@75 vram=8 accel=1 hwcursor=1 + +Or just add the following to /etc/modprobe.conf + + options intelfb mode=800x600-32@75 vram=8 accel=1 hwcursor=1 + +and just do a + + modprobe intelfb + + +E. Acknowledgment: + + 1. Geert Uytterhoeven - his excellent howto and the virtual + framebuffer driver code made this possible. + + 2. Jeff Hartmann for his agpgart code. + + 3. David Dawes for his original kernel 2.4 code. + + 4. The X developers. Insights were provided just by reading the + XFree86 source code. + + 5. Antonino A. Daplas for his inspiring i810fb driver. + + 6. Andrew Morton for his kernel patches maintenance. + +########################### +Sylvain diff --git a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt index b9eb209..1d227ee 100644 --- a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt +++ b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt @@ -43,6 +43,14 @@ Who: Randy Dunlap <rddunlap@osdl.org> --------------------------- +What: RAW driver (CONFIG_RAW_DRIVER) +When: December 2005 +Why: declared obsolete since kernel 2.6.3 + O_DIRECT can be used instead +Who: Adrian Bunk <bunk@stusta.de> + +--------------------------- + What: register_ioctl32_conversion() / unregister_ioctl32_conversion() When: April 2005 Why: Replaced by ->compat_ioctl in file_operations and other method @@ -66,6 +74,14 @@ Who: Paul E. McKenney <paulmck@us.ibm.com> --------------------------- +What: remove verify_area() +When: July 2006 +Files: Various uaccess.h headers. +Why: Deprecated and redundant. access_ok() should be used instead. +Who: Jesper Juhl <juhl-lkml@dif.dk> + +--------------------------- + What: IEEE1394 Audio and Music Data Transmission Protocol driver, Connection Management Procedures driver When: November 2005 @@ -83,3 +99,23 @@ Why: Deprecated in favour of the new ioctl-based rawiso interface, which is more efficient. You should really be using libraw1394 for raw1394 access anyway. Who: Jody McIntyre <scjody@steamballoon.com> + +--------------------------- + +What: register_serial/unregister_serial +When: December 2005 +Why: This interface does not allow serial ports to be registered against + a struct device, and as such does not allow correct power management + of such ports. 8250-based ports should use serial8250_register_port + and serial8250_unregister_port instead. +Who: Russell King <rmk@arm.linux.org.uk> + +--------------------------- + +What: i2c sysfs name change: in1_ref, vid deprecated in favour of cpu0_vid +When: November 2005 +Files: drivers/i2c/chips/adm1025.c, drivers/i2c/chips/adm1026.c +Why: Match the other drivers' name for the same function, duplicate names + will be available until removal of old names. +Who: Grant Coady <gcoady@gmail.com> + diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext2.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ext2.txt index b5cb911..d16334e 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ext2.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext2.txt @@ -58,6 +58,8 @@ noacl Don't support POSIX ACLs. nobh Do not attach buffer_heads to file pagecache. +xip Use execute in place (no caching) if possible + grpquota,noquota,quota,usrquota Quota options are silently ignored by ext2. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/isofs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/isofs.txt index f64a105..424585f 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/isofs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/isofs.txt @@ -26,7 +26,11 @@ Mount options unique to the isofs filesystem. mode=xxx Sets the permissions on files to xxx nojoliet Ignore Joliet extensions if they are present. norock Ignore Rock Ridge extensions if they are present. - unhide Show hidden files. + hide Completely strip hidden files from the file system. + showassoc Show files marked with the 'associated' bit + unhide Deprecated; showing hidden files is now default; + If given, it is a synonym for 'showassoc' which will + recreate previous unhide behavior session=x Select number of session on multisession CD sbsector=xxx Session begins from sector xxx diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt index 60f6c2c..dc27659 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt @@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ Other notes: A very simple (and naive) implementation of a device attribute is: -static ssize_t show_name(struct device * dev, char * buf) +static ssize_t show_name(struct device *dev, struct device_attribute *attr, char *buf) { return sprintf(buf,"%s\n",dev->name); } diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/tmpfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/tmpfs.txt index 417e309..0d783c5 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/tmpfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/tmpfs.txt @@ -71,8 +71,8 @@ can be changed on remount. The size parameter also accepts a suffix % to limit this tmpfs instance to that percentage of your physical RAM: the default, when neither size nor nr_blocks is specified, is size=50% -If both nr_blocks (or size) and nr_inodes are set to 0, neither blocks -nor inodes will be limited in that instance. It is generally unwise to +If nr_blocks=0 (or size=0), blocks will not be limited in that instance; +if nr_inodes=0, inodes will not be limited. It is generally unwise to mount with such options, since it allows any user with write access to use up all the memory on the machine; but enhances the scalability of that instance in a system with many cpus making intensive use of it. @@ -97,4 +97,4 @@ RAM/SWAP in 10240 inodes and it is only accessible by root. Author: Christoph Rohland <cr@sap.com>, 1.12.01 Updated: - Hugh Dickins <hugh@veritas.com>, 01 September 2004 + Hugh Dickins <hugh@veritas.com>, 13 March 2005 diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/xip.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/xip.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6c0cef1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/xip.txt @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ +Execute-in-place for file mappings +---------------------------------- + +Motivation +---------- +File mappings are performed by mapping page cache pages to userspace. In +addition, read&write type file operations also transfer data from/to the page +cache. + +For memory backed storage devices that use the block device interface, the page +cache pages are in fact copies of the original storage. Various approaches +exist to work around the need for an extra copy. The ramdisk driver for example +does read the data into the page cache, keeps a reference, and discards the +original data behind later on. + +Execute-in-place solves this issue the other way around: instead of keeping +data in the page cache, the need to have a page cache copy is eliminated +completely. With execute-in-place, read&write type operations are performed +directly from/to the memory backed storage device. For file mappings, the +storage device itself is mapped directly into userspace. + +This implementation was initialy written for shared memory segments between +different virtual machines on s390 hardware to allow multiple machines to +share the same binaries and libraries. + +Implementation +-------------- +Execute-in-place is implemented in three steps: block device operation, +address space operation, and file operations. + +A block device operation named direct_access is used to retrieve a +reference (pointer) to a block on-disk. The reference is supposed to be +cpu-addressable, physical address and remain valid until the release operation +is performed. A struct block_device reference is used to address the device, +and a sector_t argument is used to identify the individual block. As an +alternative, memory technology devices can be used for this. + +The block device operation is optional, these block devices support it as of +today: +- dcssblk: s390 dcss block device driver + +An address space operation named get_xip_page is used to retrieve reference +to a struct page. To address the target page, a reference to an address_space, +and a sector number is provided. A 3rd argument indicates whether the +function should allocate blocks if needed. + +This address space operation is mutually exclusive with readpage&writepage that +do page cache read/write operations. +The following filesystems support it as of today: +- ext2: the second extended filesystem, see Documentation/filesystems/ext2.txt + +A set of file operations that do utilize get_xip_page can be found in +mm/filemap_xip.c . The following file operation implementations are provided: +- aio_read/aio_write +- readv/writev +- sendfile + +The generic file operations do_sync_read/do_sync_write can be used to implement +classic synchronous IO calls. + +Shortcomings +------------ +This implementation is limited to storage devices that are cpu addressable at +all times (no highmem or such). It works well on rom/ram, but enhancements are +needed to make it work with flash in read+write mode. +Putting the Linux kernel and/or its modules on a xip filesystem does not mean +they are not copied. diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-sis69x b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-sis69x index 5be4876..b88953d 100644 --- a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-sis69x +++ b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-sis69x @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ I suspect that this driver could be made to work for the following SiS chipsets as well: 635, and 635T. If anyone owns a board with those chips AND is willing to risk crashing & burning an otherwise well-behaved kernel in the name of progress... please contact me at <mhoffman@lightlink.com> or -via the project's mailing list: <sensors@stimpy.netroedge.com>. Please +via the project's mailing list: <lm-sensors@lm-sensors.org>. Please send bug reports and/or success stories as well. diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/chips/adm1021 b/Documentation/i2c/chips/adm1021 new file mode 100644 index 0000000..03d02bf --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/i2c/chips/adm1021 @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ +Kernel driver adm1021 +===================== + +Supported chips: + * Analog Devices ADM1021 + Prefix: 'adm1021' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 - 0x1a, 0x29 - 0x2b, 0x4c - 0x4e + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website + * Analog Devices ADM1021A/ADM1023 + Prefix: 'adm1023' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 - 0x1a, 0x29 - 0x2b, 0x4c - 0x4e + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website + * Genesys Logic GL523SM + Prefix: 'gl523sm' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 - 0x1a, 0x29 - 0x2b, 0x4c - 0x4e + Datasheet: + * Intel Xeon Processor + Prefix: - any other - may require 'force_adm1021' parameter + Addresses scanned: none + Datasheet: Publicly available at Intel website + * Maxim MAX1617 + Prefix: 'max1617' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 - 0x1a, 0x29 - 0x2b, 0x4c - 0x4e + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website + * Maxim MAX1617A + Prefix: 'max1617a' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 - 0x1a, 0x29 - 0x2b, 0x4c - 0x4e + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website + * National Semiconductor LM84 + Prefix: 'lm84' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 - 0x1a, 0x29 - 0x2b, 0x4c - 0x4e + Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website + * Philips NE1617 + Prefix: 'max1617' (probably detected as a max1617) + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 - 0x1a, 0x29 - 0x2b, 0x4c - 0x4e + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Philips website + * Philips NE1617A + Prefix: 'max1617' (probably detected as a max1617) + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 - 0x1a, 0x29 - 0x2b, 0x4c - 0x4e + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Philips website + * TI THMC10 + Prefix: 'thmc10' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 - 0x1a, 0x29 - 0x2b, 0x4c - 0x4e + Datasheet: Publicly available at the TI website + * Onsemi MC1066 + Prefix: 'mc1066' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 - 0x1a, 0x29 - 0x2b, 0x4c - 0x4e + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Onsemi website + + +Authors: + Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>, + Philip Edelbrock <phil@netroedge.com> + +Module Parameters +----------------- + +* read_only: int + Don't set any values, read only mode + + +Description +----------- + +The chips supported by this driver are very similar. The Maxim MAX1617 is +the oldest; it has the problem that it is not very well detectable. The +MAX1617A solves that. The ADM1021 is a straight clone of the MAX1617A. +Ditto for the THMC10. From here on, we will refer to all these chips as +ADM1021-clones. + +The ADM1021 and MAX1617A reports a die code, which is a sort of revision +code. This can help us pinpoint problems; it is not very useful +otherwise. + +ADM1021-clones implement two temperature sensors. One of them is internal, +and measures the temperature of the chip itself; the other is external and +is realised in the form of a transistor-like device. A special alarm +indicates whether the remote sensor is connected. + +Each sensor has its own low and high limits. When they are crossed, the +corresponding alarm is set and remains on as long as the temperature stays +out of range. Temperatures are measured in degrees Celsius. Measurements +are possible between -65 and +127 degrees, with a resolution of one degree. + +If an alarm triggers, it will remain triggered until the hardware register +is read at least once. This means that the cause for the alarm may already +have disappeared! + +This driver only updates its values each 1.5 seconds; reading it more often +will do no harm, but will return 'old' values. It is possible to make +ADM1021-clones do faster measurements, but there is really no good reason +for that. + +Xeon support +------------ + +Some Xeon processors have real max1617, adm1021, or compatible chips +within them, with two temperature sensors. + +Other Xeons have chips with only one sensor. + +If you have a Xeon, and the adm1021 module loads, and both temperatures +appear valid, then things are good. + +If the adm1021 module doesn't load, you should try this: + modprobe adm1021 force_adm1021=BUS,ADDRESS + ADDRESS can only be 0x18, 0x1a, 0x29, 0x2b, 0x4c, or 0x4e. + +If you have dual Xeons you may have appear to have two separate +adm1021-compatible chips, or two single-temperature sensors, at distinct +addresses. diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/chips/adm1025 b/Documentation/i2c/chips/adm1025 new file mode 100644 index 0000000..39d2b78 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/i2c/chips/adm1025 @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ +Kernel driver adm1025 +===================== + +Supported chips: + * Analog Devices ADM1025, ADM1025A + Prefix: 'adm1025' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c - 0x2e + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website + * Philips NE1619 + Prefix: 'ne1619' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c - 0x2d + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Philips website + +The NE1619 presents some differences with the original ADM1025: + * Only two possible addresses (0x2c - 0x2d). + * No temperature offset register, but we don't use it anyway. + * No INT mode for pin 16. We don't play with it anyway. + +Authors: + Chen-Yuan Wu <gwu@esoft.com>, + Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org> + +Description +----------- + +(This is from Analog Devices.) The ADM1025 is a complete system hardware +monitor for microprocessor-based systems, providing measurement and limit +comparison of various system parameters. Five voltage measurement inputs +are provided, for monitoring +2.5V, +3.3V, +5V and +12V power supplies and +the processor core voltage. The ADM1025 can monitor a sixth power-supply +voltage by measuring its own VCC. One input (two pins) is dedicated to a +remote temperature-sensing diode and an on-chip temperature sensor allows +ambient temperature to be monitored. + +One specificity of this chip is that the pin 11 can be hardwired in two +different manners. It can act as the +12V power-supply voltage analog +input, or as the a fifth digital entry for the VID reading (bit 4). It's +kind of strange since both are useful, and the reason for designing the +chip that way is obscure at least to me. The bit 5 of the configuration +register can be used to define how the chip is hardwired. Please note that +it is not a choice you have to make as the user. The choice was already +made by your motherboard's maker. If the configuration bit isn't set +properly, you'll have a wrong +12V reading or a wrong VID reading. The way +the driver handles that is to preserve this bit through the initialization +process, assuming that the BIOS set it up properly beforehand. If it turns +out not to be true in some cases, we'll provide a module parameter to force +modes. + +This driver also supports the ADM1025A, which differs from the ADM1025 +only in that it has "open-drain VID inputs while the ADM1025 has on-chip +100k pull-ups on the VID inputs". It doesn't make any difference for us. diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/chips/adm1026 b/Documentation/i2c/chips/adm1026 new file mode 100644 index 0000000..473c689 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/i2c/chips/adm1026 @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +Kernel driver adm1026 +===================== + +Supported chips: + * Analog Devices ADM1026 + Prefix: 'adm1026' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website + http://www.analog.com/en/prod/0,,766_825_ADM1026,00.html + +Authors: + Philip Pokorny <ppokorny@penguincomputing.com> for Penguin Computing + Justin Thiessen <jthiessen@penguincomputing.com> + +Module Parameters +----------------- + +* gpio_input: int array (min = 1, max = 17) + List of GPIO pins (0-16) to program as inputs +* gpio_output: int array (min = 1, max = 17) + List of GPIO pins (0-16) to program as outputs +* gpio_inverted: int array (min = 1, max = 17) + List of GPIO pins (0-16) to program as inverted +* gpio_normal: int array (min = 1, max = 17) + List of GPIO pins (0-16) to program as normal/non-inverted +* gpio_fan: int array (min = 1, max = 8) + List of GPIO pins (0-7) to program as fan tachs + + +Description +----------- + +This driver implements support for the Analog Devices ADM1026. Analog +Devices calls it a "complete thermal system management controller." + +The ADM1026 implements three (3) temperature sensors, 17 voltage sensors, +16 general purpose digital I/O lines, eight (8) fan speed sensors (8-bit), +an analog output and a PWM output along with limit, alarm and mask bits for +all of the above. There is even 8k bytes of EEPROM memory on chip. + +Temperatures are measured in degrees Celsius. There are two external +sensor inputs and one internal sensor. Each sensor has a high and low +limit. If the limit is exceeded, an interrupt (#SMBALERT) can be +generated. The interrupts can be masked. In addition, there are over-temp +limits for each sensor. If this limit is exceeded, the #THERM output will +be asserted. The current temperature and limits have a resolution of 1 +degree. + +Fan rotation speeds are reported in RPM (rotations per minute) but measured +in counts of a 22.5kHz internal clock. Each fan has a high limit which +corresponds to a minimum fan speed. If the limit is exceeded, an interrupt +can be generated. Each fan can be programmed to divide the reference clock +by 1, 2, 4 or 8. Not all RPM values can accurately be represented, so some +rounding is done. With a divider of 8, the slowest measurable speed of a +two pulse per revolution fan is 661 RPM. + +There are 17 voltage sensors. An alarm is triggered if the voltage has +crossed a programmable minimum or maximum limit. Note that minimum in this +case always means 'closest to zero'; this is important for negative voltage +measurements. Several inputs have integrated attenuators so they can measure +higher voltages directly. 3.3V, 5V, 12V, -12V and battery voltage all have +dedicated inputs. There are several inputs scaled to 0-3V full-scale range +for SCSI terminator power. The remaining inputs are not scaled and have +a 0-2.5V full-scale range. A 2.5V or 1.82V reference voltage is provided +for negative voltage measurements. + +If an alarm triggers, it will remain triggered until the hardware register +is read at least once. This means that the cause for the alarm may already +have disappeared! Note that in the current implementation, all hardware +registers are read whenever any data is read (unless it is less than 2.0 +seconds since the last update). This means that you can easily miss +once-only alarms. + +The ADM1026 measures continuously. Analog inputs are measured about 4 +times a second. Fan speed measurement time depends on fan speed and +divisor. It can take as long as 1.5 seconds to measure all fan speeds. + +The ADM1026 has the ability to automatically control fan speed based on the +temperature sensor inputs. Both the PWM output and the DAC output can be +used to control fan speed. Usually only one of these two outputs will be +used. Write the minimum PWM or DAC value to the appropriate control +register. Then set the low temperature limit in the tmin values for each +temperature sensor. The range of control is fixed at 20 °C, and the +largest difference between current and tmin of the temperature sensors sets +the control output. See the datasheet for several example circuits for +controlling fan speed with the PWM and DAC outputs. The fan speed sensors +do not have PWM compensation, so it is probably best to control the fan +voltage from the power lead rather than on the ground lead. + +The datasheet shows an example application with VID signals attached to +GPIO lines. Unfortunately, the chip may not be connected to the VID lines +in this way. The driver assumes that the chips *is* connected this way to +get a VID voltage. diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/chips/adm1031 b/Documentation/i2c/chips/adm1031 new file mode 100644 index 0000000..130a383 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/i2c/chips/adm1031 @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ +Kernel driver adm1031 +===================== + +Supported chips: + * Analog Devices ADM1030 + Prefix: 'adm1030' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c to 0x2e + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website + http://products.analog.com/products/info.asp?product=ADM1030 + + * Analog Devices ADM1031 + Prefix: 'adm1031' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c to 0x2e + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website + http://products.analog.com/products/info.asp?product=ADM1031 + +Authors: + Alexandre d'Alton <alex@alexdalton.org> + Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org> + +Description +----------- + +The ADM1030 and ADM1031 are digital temperature sensors and fan controllers. +They sense their own temperature as well as the temperature of up to one +(ADM1030) or two (ADM1031) external diodes. + +All temperature values are given in degrees Celsius. Resolution is 0.5 +degree for the local temperature, 0.125 degree for the remote temperatures. + +Each temperature channel has its own high and low limits, plus a critical +limit. + +The ADM1030 monitors a single fan speed, while the ADM1031 monitors up to +two. Each fan channel has its own low speed limit. diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/chips/adm9240 b/Documentation/i2c/chips/adm9240 new file mode 100644 index 0000000..35f618f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/i2c/chips/adm9240 @@ -0,0 +1,177 @@ +Kernel driver adm9240 +===================== + +Supported chips: + * Analog Devices ADM9240 + Prefix: 'adm9240' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c - 0x2f + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website + http://www.analog.com/UploadedFiles/Data_Sheets/79857778ADM9240_0.pdf + + * Dallas Semiconductor DS1780 + Prefix: 'ds1780' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c - 0x2f + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Dallas Semiconductor (Maxim) website + http://pdfserv.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/DS1780.pdf + + * National Semiconductor LM81 + Prefix: 'lm81' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c - 0x2f + Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website + http://www.national.com/ds.cgi/LM/LM81.pdf + +Authors: + Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>, + Philip Edelbrock <phil@netroedge.com>, + Michiel Rook <michiel@grendelproject.nl>, + Grant Coady <gcoady@gmail.com> with guidance + from Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org> + +Interface +--------- +The I2C addresses listed above assume BIOS has not changed the +chip MSB 5-bit address. Each chip reports a unique manufacturer +identification code as well as the chip revision/stepping level. + +Description +----------- +[From ADM9240] The ADM9240 is a complete system hardware monitor for +microprocessor-based systems, providing measurement and limit comparison +of up to four power supplies and two processor core voltages, plus +temperature, two fan speeds and chassis intrusion. Measured values can +be read out via an I2C-compatible serial System Management Bus, and values +for limit comparisons can be programmed in over the same serial bus. The +high speed successive approximation ADC allows frequent sampling of all +analog channels to ensure a fast interrupt response to any out-of-limit +measurement. + +The ADM9240, DS1780 and LM81 are register compatible, the following +details are common to the three chips. Chip differences are described +after this section. + + +Measurements +------------ +The measurement cycle + +The adm9240 driver will take a measurement reading no faster than once +each two seconds. User-space may read sysfs interface faster than the +measurement update rate and will receive cached data from the most +recent measurement. + +ADM9240 has a very fast 320us temperature and voltage measurement cycle +with independent fan speed measurement cycles counting alternating rising +edges of the fan tacho inputs. + +DS1780 measurement cycle is about once per second including fan speed. + +LM81 measurement cycle is about once per 400ms including fan speed. +The LM81 12-bit extended temperature measurement mode is not supported. + +Temperature +----------- +On chip temperature is reported as degrees Celsius as 9-bit signed data +with resolution of 0.5 degrees Celsius. High and low temperature limits +are 8-bit signed data with resolution of one degree Celsius. + +Temperature alarm is asserted once the temperature exceeds the high limit, +and is cleared when the temperature falls below the temp1_max_hyst value. + +Fan Speed +--------- +Two fan tacho inputs are provided, the ADM9240 gates an internal 22.5kHz +clock via a divider to an 8-bit counter. Fan speed (rpm) is calculated by: + +rpm = (22500 * 60) / (count * divider) + +Automatic fan clock divider + + * User sets 0 to fan_min limit + - low speed alarm is disabled + - fan clock divider not changed + - auto fan clock adjuster enabled for valid fan speed reading + + * User sets fan_min limit too low + - low speed alarm is enabled + - fan clock divider set to max + - fan_min set to register value 254 which corresponds + to 664 rpm on adm9240 + - low speed alarm will be asserted if fan speed is + less than minimum measurable speed + - auto fan clock adjuster disabled + + * User sets reasonable fan speed + - low speed alarm is enabled + - fan clock divider set to suit fan_min + - auto fan clock adjuster enabled: adjusts fan_min + + * User sets unreasonably high low fan speed limit + - resolution of the low speed limit may be reduced + - alarm will be asserted + - auto fan clock adjuster enabled: adjusts fan_min + + * fan speed may be displayed as zero until the auto fan clock divider + adjuster brings fan speed clock divider back into chip measurement + range, this will occur within a few measurement cycles. + +Analog Output +------------- +An analog output provides a 0 to 1.25 volt signal intended for an external +fan speed amplifier circuit. The analog output is set to maximum value on +power up or reset. This doesn't do much on the test Intel SE440BX-2. + +Voltage Monitor + +Voltage (IN) measurement is internally scaled: + + nr label nominal maximum resolution + mV mV mV + 0 +2.5V 2500 3320 13.0 + 1 Vccp1 2700 3600 14.1 + 2 +3.3V 3300 4380 17.2 + 3 +5V 5000 6640 26.0 + 4 +12V 12000 15940 62.5 + 5 Vccp2 2700 3600 14.1 + +The reading is an unsigned 8-bit value, nominal voltage measurement is +represented by a reading of 192, being 3/4 of the measurement range. + +An alarm is asserted for any voltage going below or above the set limits. + +The driver reports and accepts voltage limits scaled to the above table. + +VID Monitor +----------- +The chip has five inputs to read the 5-bit VID and reports the mV value +based on detected CPU type. + +Chassis Intrusion +----------------- +An alarm is asserted when the CI pin goes active high. The ADM9240 +Datasheet has an example of an external temperature sensor driving +this pin. On an Intel SE440BX-2 the Chassis Intrusion header is +connected to a normally open switch. + +The ADM9240 provides an internal open drain on this line, and may output +a 20 ms active low pulse to reset an external Chassis Intrusion latch. + +Clear the CI latch by writing value 1 to the sysfs chassis_clear file. + +Alarm flags reported as 16-bit word + + bit label comment + --- ------------- -------------------------- + 0 +2.5 V_Error high or low limit exceeded + 1 VCCP_Error high or low limit exceeded + 2 +3.3 V_Error high or low limit exceeded + 3 +5 V_Error high or low limit exceeded + 4 Temp_Error temperature error + 6 FAN1_Error fan low limit exceeded + 7 FAN2_Error fan low limit exceeded + 8 +12 V_Error high or low limit exceeded + 9 VCCP2_Error high or low limit exceeded + 12 Chassis_Error CI pin went high + +Remaining bits are reserved and thus undefined. It is important to note +that alarm bits may be cleared on read, user-space may latch alarms and +provide the end-user with a method to clear alarm memory. diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/chips/asb100 b/Documentation/i2c/chips/asb100 new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ab7365e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/i2c/chips/asb100 @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ +Kernel driver asb100 +==================== + +Supported Chips: + * Asus ASB100 and ASB100-A "Bach" + Prefix: 'asb100' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2d + Datasheet: none released + +Author: Mark M. Hoffman <mhoffman@lightlink.com> + +Description +----------- + +This driver implements support for the Asus ASB100 and ASB100-A "Bach". +These are custom ASICs available only on Asus mainboards. Asus refuses to +supply a datasheet for these chips. Thanks go to many people who helped +investigate their hardware, including: + +Vitaly V. Bursov +Alexander van Kaam (author of MBM for Windows) +Bertrik Sikken + +The ASB100 implements seven voltage sensors, three fan rotation speed +sensors, four temperature sensors, VID lines and alarms. In addition to +these, the ASB100-A also implements a single PWM controller for fans 2 and +3 (i.e. one setting controls both.) If you have a plain ASB100, the PWM +controller will simply not work (or maybe it will for you... it doesn't for +me). + +Temperatures are measured and reported in degrees Celsius. + +Fan speeds are reported in RPM (rotations per minute). An alarm is +triggered if the rotation speed has dropped below a programmable limit. + +Voltage sensors (also known as IN sensors) report values in volts. + +The VID lines encode the core voltage value: the voltage level your +processor should work with. This is hardcoded by the mainboard and/or +processor itself. It is a value in volts. + +Alarms: (TODO question marks indicate may or may not work) + +0x0001 => in0 (?) +0x0002 => in1 (?) +0x0004 => in2 +0x0008 => in3 +0x0010 => temp1 (1) +0x0020 => temp2 +0x0040 => fan1 +0x0080 => fan2 +0x0100 => in4 +0x0200 => in5 (?) (2) +0x0400 => in6 (?) (2) +0x0800 => fan3 +0x1000 => chassis switch +0x2000 => temp3 + +Alarm Notes: + +(1) This alarm will only trigger if the hysteresis value is 127C. +I.e. it behaves the same as w83781d. + +(2) The min and max registers for these values appear to +be read-only or otherwise stuck at 0x00. + +TODO: +* Experiment with fan divisors > 8. +* Experiment with temp. sensor types. +* Are there really 13 voltage inputs? Probably not... +* Cleanups, no doubt... + diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/chips/ds1621 b/Documentation/i2c/chips/ds1621 new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1fee6f1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/i2c/chips/ds1621 @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ +Kernel driver ds1621 +==================== + +Supported chips: + * Dallas Semiconductor DS1621 + Prefix: 'ds1621' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4f + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Dallas Semiconductor website + http://www.dalsemi.com/ + * Dallas Semiconductor DS1625 + Prefix: 'ds1621' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4f + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Dallas Semiconductor website + http://www.dalsemi.com/ + +Authors: + Christian W. Zuckschwerdt <zany@triq.net> + valuable contributions by Jan M. Sendler <sendler@sendler.de> + ported to 2.6 by Aurelien Jarno <aurelien@aurel32.net> + with the help of Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org> + +Module Parameters +------------------ + +* polarity int + Output's polarity: 0 = active high, 1 = active low + +Description +----------- + +The DS1621 is a (one instance) digital thermometer and thermostat. It has +both high and low temperature limits which can be user defined (i.e. +programmed into non-volatile on-chip registers). Temperature range is -55 +degree Celsius to +125 in 0.5 increments. You may convert this into a +Fahrenheit range of -67 to +257 degrees with 0.9 steps. If polarity +parameter is not provided, original value is used. + +As for the thermostat, behavior can also be programmed using the polarity +toggle. On the one hand ("heater"), the thermostat output of the chip, +Tout, will trigger when the low limit temperature is met or underrun and +stays high until the high limit is met or exceeded. On the other hand +("cooler"), vice versa. That way "heater" equals "active low", whereas +"conditioner" equals "active high". Please note that the DS1621 data sheet +is somewhat misleading in this point since setting the polarity bit does +not simply invert Tout. + +A second thing is that, during extensive testing, Tout showed a tolerance +of up to +/- 0.5 degrees even when compared against precise temperature +readings. Be sure to have a high vs. low temperature limit gap of al least +1.0 degree Celsius to avoid Tout "bouncing", though! + +As for alarms, you can read the alarm status of the DS1621 via the 'alarms' +/sys file interface. The result consists mainly of bit 6 and 5 of the +configuration register of the chip; bit 6 (0x40 or 64) is the high alarm +bit and bit 5 (0x20 or 32) the low one. These bits are set when the high or +low limits are met or exceeded and are reset by the module as soon as the +respective temperature ranges are left. + +The alarm registers are in no way suitable to find out about the actual +status of Tout. They will only tell you about its history, whether or not +any of the limits have ever been met or exceeded since last power-up or +reset. Be aware: When testing, it showed that the status of Tout can change +with neither of the alarms set. + +Temperature conversion of the DS1621 takes up to 1000ms; internal access to +non-volatile registers may last for 10ms or below. + +High Accuracy Temperature Reading +--------------------------------- + +As said before, the temperature issued via the 9-bit i2c-bus data is +somewhat arbitrary. Internally, the temperature conversion is of a +different kind that is explained (not so...) well in the DS1621 data sheet. +To cut the long story short: Inside the DS1621 there are two oscillators, +both of them biassed by a temperature coefficient. + +Higher resolution of the temperature reading can be achieved using the +internal projection, which means taking account of REG_COUNT and REG_SLOPE +(the driver manages them): + +Taken from Dallas Semiconductors App Note 068: 'Increasing Temperature +Resolution on the DS1620' and App Note 105: 'High Resolution Temperature +Measurement with Dallas Direct-to-Digital Temperature Sensors' + +- Read the 9-bit temperature and strip the LSB (Truncate the .5 degs) +- The resulting value is TEMP_READ. +- Then, read REG_COUNT. +- And then, REG_SLOPE. + + TEMP = TEMP_READ - 0.25 + ((REG_SLOPE - REG_COUNT) / REG_SLOPE) + +Note that this is what the DONE bit in the DS1621 configuration register is +good for: Internally, one temperature conversion takes up to 1000ms. Before +that conversion is complete you will not be able to read valid things out +of REG_COUNT and REG_SLOPE. The DONE bit, as you may have guessed by now, +tells you whether the conversion is complete ("done", in plain English) and +thus, whether the values you read are good or not. + +The DS1621 has two modes of operation: "Continuous" conversion, which can +be understood as the default stand-alone mode where the chip gets the +temperature and controls external devices via its Tout pin or tells other +i2c's about it if they care. The other mode is called "1SHOT", that means +that it only figures out about the temperature when it is explicitly told +to do so; this can be seen as power saving mode. + +Now if you want to read REG_COUNT and REG_SLOPE, you have to either stop +the continuous conversions until the contents of these registers are valid, +or, in 1SHOT mode, you have to have one conversion made. diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/chips/eeprom b/Documentation/i2c/chips/eeprom new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f7e8104 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/i2c/chips/eeprom @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ +Kernel driver eeprom +==================== + +Supported chips: + * Any EEPROM chip in the designated address range + Prefix: 'eeprom' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x50 - 0x57 + Datasheets: Publicly available from: + Atmel (www.atmel.com), + Catalyst (www.catsemi.com), + Fairchild (www.fairchildsemi.com), + Microchip (www.microchip.com), + Philips (www.semiconductor.philips.com), + Rohm (www.rohm.com), + ST (www.st.com), + Xicor (www.xicor.com), + and others. + + Chip Size (bits) Address + 24C01 1K 0x50 (shadows at 0x51 - 0x57) + 24C01A 1K 0x50 - 0x57 (Typical device on DIMMs) + 24C02 2K 0x50 - 0x57 + 24C04 4K 0x50, 0x52, 0x54, 0x56 + (additional data at 0x51, 0x53, 0x55, 0x57) + 24C08 8K 0x50, 0x54 (additional data at 0x51, 0x52, + 0x53, 0x55, 0x56, 0x57) + 24C16 16K 0x50 (additional data at 0x51 - 0x57) + Sony 2K 0x57 + + Atmel 34C02B 2K 0x50 - 0x57, SW write protect at 0x30-37 + Catalyst 34FC02 2K 0x50 - 0x57, SW write protect at 0x30-37 + Catalyst 34RC02 2K 0x50 - 0x57, SW write protect at 0x30-37 + Fairchild 34W02 2K 0x50 - 0x57, SW write protect at 0x30-37 + Microchip 24AA52 2K 0x50 - 0x57, SW write protect at 0x30-37 + ST M34C02 2K 0x50 - 0x57, SW write protect at 0x30-37 + + +Authors: + Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>, + Philip Edelbrock <phil@netroedge.com>, + Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>, + Greg Kroah-Hartman <greg@kroah.com>, + IBM Corp. + +Description +----------- + +This is a simple EEPROM module meant to enable reading the first 256 bytes +of an EEPROM (on a SDRAM DIMM for example). However, it will access serial +EEPROMs on any I2C adapter. The supported devices are generically called +24Cxx, and are listed above; however the numbering for these +industry-standard devices may vary by manufacturer. + +This module was a programming exercise to get used to the new project +organization laid out by Frodo, but it should be at least completely +effective for decoding the contents of EEPROMs on DIMMs. + +DIMMS will typically contain a 24C01A or 24C02, or the 34C02 variants. +The other devices will not be found on a DIMM because they respond to more +than one address. + +DDC Monitors may contain any device. Often a 24C01, which responds to all 8 +addresses, is found. + +Recent Sony Vaio laptops have an EEPROM at 0x57. We couldn't get the +specification, so it is guess work and far from being complete. + +The Microchip 24AA52/24LCS52, ST M34C02, and others support an additional +software write protect register at 0x30 - 0x37 (0x20 less than the memory +location). The chip responds to "write quick" detection at this address but +does not respond to byte reads. If this register is present, the lower 128 +bytes of the memory array are not write protected. Any byte data write to +this address will write protect the memory array permanently, and the +device will no longer respond at the 0x30-37 address. The eeprom driver +does not support this register. + +Lacking functionality: + +* Full support for larger devices (24C04, 24C08, 24C16). These are not +typically found on a PC. These devices will appear as separate devices at +multiple addresses. + +* Support for really large devices (24C32, 24C64, 24C128, 24C256, 24C512). +These devices require two-byte address fields and are not supported. + +* Enable Writing. Again, no technical reason why not, but making it easy +to change the contents of the EEPROMs (on DIMMs anyway) also makes it easy +to disable the DIMMs (potentially preventing the computer from booting) +until the values are restored somehow. + +Use: + +After inserting the module (and any other required SMBus/i2c modules), you +should have some EEPROM directories in /sys/bus/i2c/devices/* of names such +as "0-0050". Inside each of these is a series of files, the eeprom file +contains the binary data from EEPROM. diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/chips/fscher b/Documentation/i2c/chips/fscher new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6403165 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/i2c/chips/fscher @@ -0,0 +1,169 @@ +Kernel driver fscher +==================== + +Supported chips: + * Fujitsu-Siemens Hermes chip + Prefix: 'fscher' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x73 + +Authors: + Reinhard Nissl <rnissl@gmx.de> based on work + from Hermann Jung <hej@odn.de>, + Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>, + Philip Edelbrock <phil@netroedge.com> + +Description +----------- + +This driver implements support for the Fujitsu-Siemens Hermes chip. It is +described in the 'Register Set Specification BMC Hermes based Systemboard' +from Fujitsu-Siemens. + +The Hermes chip implements a hardware-based system management, e.g. for +controlling fan speed and core voltage. There is also a watchdog counter on +the chip which can trigger an alarm and even shut the system down. + +The chip provides three temperature values (CPU, motherboard and +auxiliary), three voltage values (+12V, +5V and battery) and three fans +(power supply, CPU and auxiliary). + +Temperatures are measured in degrees Celsius. The resolution is 1 degree. + +Fan rotation speeds are reported in RPM (rotations per minute). The value +can be divided by a programmable divider (1, 2 or 4) which is stored on +the chip. + +Voltage sensors (also known as "in" sensors) report their values in volts. + +All values are reported as final values from the driver. There is no need +for further calculations. + + +Detailed description +-------------------- + +Below you'll find a single line description of all the bit values. With +this information, you're able to decode e. g. alarms, wdog, etc. To make +use of the watchdog, you'll need to set the watchdog time and enable the +watchdog. After that it is necessary to restart the watchdog time within +the specified period of time, or a system reset will occur. + +* revision + READING & 0xff = 0x??: HERMES revision identification + +* alarms + READING & 0x80 = 0x80: CPU throttling active + READING & 0x80 = 0x00: CPU running at full speed + + READING & 0x10 = 0x10: software event (see control:1) + READING & 0x10 = 0x00: no software event + + READING & 0x08 = 0x08: watchdog event (see wdog:2) + READING & 0x08 = 0x00: no watchdog event + + READING & 0x02 = 0x02: thermal event (see temp*:1) + READING & 0x02 = 0x00: no thermal event + + READING & 0x01 = 0x01: fan event (see fan*:1) + READING & 0x01 = 0x00: no fan event + + READING & 0x13 ! 0x00: ALERT LED is flashing + +* control + READING & 0x01 = 0x01: software event + READING & 0x01 = 0x00: no software event + + WRITING & 0x01 = 0x01: set software event + WRITING & 0x01 = 0x00: clear software event + +* watchdog_control + READING & 0x80 = 0x80: power off on watchdog event while thermal event + READING & 0x80 = 0x00: watchdog power off disabled (just system reset enabled) + + READING & 0x40 = 0x40: watchdog timebase 60 seconds (see also wdog:1) + READING & 0x40 = 0x00: watchdog timebase 2 seconds + + READING & 0x10 = 0x10: watchdog enabled + READING & 0x10 = 0x00: watchdog disabled + + WRITING & 0x80 = 0x80: enable "power off on watchdog event while thermal event" + WRITING & 0x80 = 0x00: disable "power off on watchdog event while thermal event" + + WRITING & 0x40 = 0x40: set watchdog timebase to 60 seconds + WRITING & 0x40 = 0x00: set watchdog timebase to 2 seconds + + WRITING & 0x20 = 0x20: disable watchdog + + WRITING & 0x10 = 0x10: enable watchdog / restart watchdog time + +* watchdog_state + READING & 0x02 = 0x02: watchdog system reset occurred + READING & 0x02 = 0x00: no watchdog system reset occurred + + WRITING & 0x02 = 0x02: clear watchdog event + +* watchdog_preset + READING & 0xff = 0x??: configured watch dog time in units (see wdog:3 0x40) + + WRITING & 0xff = 0x??: configure watch dog time in units + +* in* (0: +5V, 1: +12V, 2: onboard 3V battery) + READING: actual voltage value + +* temp*_status (1: CPU sensor, 2: onboard sensor, 3: auxiliary sensor) + READING & 0x02 = 0x02: thermal event (overtemperature) + READING & 0x02 = 0x00: no thermal event + + READING & 0x01 = 0x01: sensor is working + READING & 0x01 = 0x00: sensor is faulty + + WRITING & 0x02 = 0x02: clear thermal event + +* temp*_input (1: CPU sensor, 2: onboard sensor, 3: auxiliary sensor) + READING: actual temperature value + +* fan*_status (1: power supply fan, 2: CPU fan, 3: auxiliary fan) + READING & 0x04 = 0x04: fan event (fan fault) + READING & 0x04 = 0x00: no fan event + + WRITING & 0x04 = 0x04: clear fan event + +* fan*_div (1: power supply fan, 2: CPU fan, 3: auxiliary fan) + Divisors 2,4 and 8 are supported, both for reading and writing + +* fan*_pwm (1: power supply fan, 2: CPU fan, 3: auxiliary fan) + READING & 0xff = 0x00: fan may be switched off + READING & 0xff = 0x01: fan must run at least at minimum speed (supply: 6V) + READING & 0xff = 0xff: fan must run at maximum speed (supply: 12V) + READING & 0xff = 0x??: fan must run at least at given speed (supply: 6V..12V) + + WRITING & 0xff = 0x00: fan may be switched off + WRITING & 0xff = 0x01: fan must run at least at minimum speed (supply: 6V) + WRITING & 0xff = 0xff: fan must run at maximum speed (supply: 12V) + WRITING & 0xff = 0x??: fan must run at least at given speed (supply: 6V..12V) + +* fan*_input (1: power supply fan, 2: CPU fan, 3: auxiliary fan) + READING: actual RPM value + + +Limitations +----------- + +* Measuring fan speed +It seems that the chip counts "ripples" (typical fans produce 2 ripples per +rotation while VERAX fans produce 18) in a 9-bit register. This register is +read out every second, then the ripple prescaler (2, 4 or 8) is applied and +the result is stored in the 8 bit output register. Due to the limitation of +the counting register to 9 bits, it is impossible to measure a VERAX fan +properly (even with a prescaler of 8). At its maximum speed of 3500 RPM the +fan produces 1080 ripples per second which causes the counting register to +overflow twice, leading to only 186 RPM. + +* Measuring input voltages +in2 ("battery") reports the voltage of the onboard lithium battery and not ++3.3V from the power supply. + +* Undocumented features +Fujitsu-Siemens Computers has not documented all features of the chip so +far. Their software, System Guard, shows that there are a still some +features which cannot be controlled by this implementation. diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/chips/gl518sm b/Documentation/i2c/chips/gl518sm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ce08818 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/i2c/chips/gl518sm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ +Kernel driver gl518sm +===================== + +Supported chips: + * Genesys Logic GL518SM release 0x00 + Prefix: 'gl518sm' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c and 0x2d + Datasheet: http://www.genesyslogic.com/pdf + * Genesys Logic GL518SM release 0x80 + Prefix: 'gl518sm' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c and 0x2d + Datasheet: http://www.genesyslogic.com/pdf + +Authors: + Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>, + Kyösti Mälkki <kmalkki@cc.hut.fi> + Hong-Gunn Chew <hglinux@gunnet.org> + Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org> + +Description +----------- + +IMPORTANT: + +For the revision 0x00 chip, the in0, in1, and in2 values (+5V, +3V, +and +12V) CANNOT be read. This is a limitation of the chip, not the driver. + +This driver supports the Genesys Logic GL518SM chip. There are at least +two revision of this chip, which we call revision 0x00 and 0x80. Revision +0x80 chips support the reading of all voltages and revision 0x00 only +for VIN3. + +The GL518SM implements one temperature sensor, two fan rotation speed +sensors, and four voltage sensors. It can report alarms through the +computer speakers. + +Temperatures are measured in degrees Celsius. An alarm goes off while the +temperature is above the over temperature limit, and has not yet dropped +below the hysteresis limit. The alarm always reflects the current +situation. Measurements are guaranteed between -10 degrees and +110 +degrees, with a accuracy of +/-3 degrees. + +Rotation speeds are reported in RPM (rotations per minute). An alarm is +triggered if the rotation speed has dropped below a programmable limit. In +case when you have selected to turn fan1 off, no fan1 alarm is triggered. + +Fan readings can be divided by a programmable divider (1, 2, 4 or 8) to +give the readings more range or accuracy. Not all RPM values can +accurately be represented, so some rounding is done. With a divider +of 2, the lowest representable value is around 1900 RPM. + +Voltage sensors (also known as VIN sensors) report their values in volts. +An alarm is triggered if the voltage has crossed a programmable minimum or +maximum limit. Note that minimum in this case always means 'closest to +zero'; this is important for negative voltage measurements. The VDD input +measures voltages between 0.000 and 5.865 volt, with a resolution of 0.023 +volt. The other inputs measure voltages between 0.000 and 4.845 volt, with +a resolution of 0.019 volt. Note that revision 0x00 chips do not support +reading the current voltage of any input except for VIN3; limit setting and +alarms work fine, though. + +When an alarm is triggered, you can be warned by a beeping signal through your +computer speaker. It is possible to enable all beeping globally, or only the +beeping for some alarms. + +If an alarm triggers, it will remain triggered until the hardware register +is read at least once (except for temperature alarms). This means that the +cause for the alarm may already have disappeared! Note that in the current +implementation, all hardware registers are read whenever any data is read +(unless it is less than 1.5 seconds since the last update). This means that +you can easily miss once-only alarms. + +The GL518SM only updates its values each 1.5 seconds; reading it more often +will do no harm, but will return 'old' values. diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/chips/it87 b/Documentation/i2c/chips/it87 new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0d01950 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/i2c/chips/it87 @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ +Kernel driver it87 +================== + +Supported chips: + * IT8705F + Prefix: 'it87' + Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space, or default ISA 0x290 (8 I/O ports) + Datasheet: Publicly available at the ITE website + http://www.ite.com.tw/ + * IT8712F + Prefix: 'it8712' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x28 - 0x2f + from Super I/O config space, or default ISA 0x290 (8 I/O ports) + Datasheet: Publicly available at the ITE website + http://www.ite.com.tw/ + * SiS950 [clone of IT8705F] + Prefix: 'sis950' + Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space, or default ISA 0x290 (8 I/O ports) + Datasheet: No longer be available + +Author: Christophe Gauthron <chrisg@0-in.com> + + +Module Parameters +----------------- + +* update_vbat: int + + 0 if vbat should report power on value, 1 if vbat should be updated after + each read. Default is 0. On some boards the battery voltage is provided + by either the battery or the onboard power supply. Only the first reading + at power on will be the actual battery voltage (which the chip does + automatically). On other boards the battery voltage is always fed to + the chip so can be read at any time. Excessive reading may decrease + battery life but no information is given in the datasheet. + +* fix_pwm_polarity int + + Force PWM polarity to active high (DANGEROUS). Some chips are + misconfigured by BIOS - PWM values would be inverted. This option tries + to fix this. Please contact your BIOS manufacturer and ask him for fix. + +Description +----------- + +This driver implements support for the IT8705F, IT8712F and SiS950 chips. + +This driver also supports IT8712F, which adds SMBus access, and a VID +input, used to report the Vcore voltage of the Pentium processor. +The IT8712F additionally features VID inputs. + +These chips are 'Super I/O chips', supporting floppy disks, infrared ports, +joysticks and other miscellaneous stuff. For hardware monitoring, they +include an 'environment controller' with 3 temperature sensors, 3 fan +rotation speed sensors, 8 voltage sensors, and associated alarms. + +Temperatures are measured in degrees Celsius. An alarm is triggered once +when the Overtemperature Shutdown limit is crossed. + +Fan rotation speeds are reported in RPM (rotations per minute). An alarm is +triggered if the rotation speed has dropped below a programmable limit. Fan +readings can be divided by a programmable divider (1, 2, 4 or 8) to give the +readings more range or accuracy. Not all RPM values can accurately be +represented, so some rounding is done. With a divider of 2, the lowest +representable value is around 2600 RPM. + +Voltage sensors (also known as IN sensors) report their values in volts. An +alarm is triggered if the voltage has crossed a programmable minimum or +maximum limit. Note that minimum in this case always means 'closest to +zero'; this is important for negative voltage measurements. All voltage +inputs can measure voltages between 0 and 4.08 volts, with a resolution of +0.016 volt. The battery voltage in8 does not have limit registers. + +The VID lines (IT8712F only) encode the core voltage value: the voltage +level your processor should work with. This is hardcoded by the mainboard +and/or processor itself. It is a value in volts. + +If an alarm triggers, it will remain triggered until the hardware register +is read at least once. This means that the cause for the alarm may already +have disappeared! Note that in the current implementation, all hardware +registers are read whenever any data is read (unless it is less than 1.5 +seconds since the last update). This means that you can easily miss +once-only alarms. + +The IT87xx only updates its values each 1.5 seconds; reading it more often +will do no harm, but will return 'old' values. + +To change sensor N to a thermistor, 'echo 2 > tempN_type' where N is 1, 2, +or 3. To change sensor N to a thermal diode, 'echo 3 > tempN_type'. +Give 0 for unused sensor. Any other value is invalid. To configure this at +startup, consult lm_sensors's /etc/sensors.conf. (2 = thermistor; +3 = thermal diode) + +The fan speed control features are limited to manual PWM mode. Automatic +"Smart Guardian" mode control handling is not implemented. However +if you want to go for "manual mode" just write 1 to pwmN_enable. diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/chips/lm63 b/Documentation/i2c/chips/lm63 new file mode 100644 index 0000000..31660bf --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/i2c/chips/lm63 @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ +Kernel driver lm63 +================== + +Supported chips: + * National Semiconductor LM63 + Prefix: 'lm63' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c + Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website + http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM63.html + +Author: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org> + +Thanks go to Tyan and especially Alex Buckingham for setting up a remote +access to their S4882 test platform for this driver. + http://www.tyan.com/ + +Description +----------- + +The LM63 is a digital temperature sensor with integrated fan monitoring +and control. + +The LM63 is basically an LM86 with fan speed monitoring and control +capabilities added. It misses some of the LM86 features though: + - No low limit for local temperature. + - No critical limit for local temperature. + - Critical limit for remote temperature can be changed only once. We + will consider that the critical limit is read-only. + +The datasheet isn't very clear about what the tachometer reading is. + +An explanation from National Semiconductor: The two lower bits of the read +value have to be masked out. The value is still 16 bit in width. + +All temperature values are given in degrees Celsius. Resolution is 1.0 +degree for the local temperature, 0.125 degree for the remote temperature. + +The fan speed is measured using a tachometer. Contrary to most chips which +store the value in an 8-bit register and have a selectable clock divider +to make sure that the result will fit in the register, the LM63 uses 16-bit +value for measuring the speed of the fan. It can measure fan speeds down to +83 RPM, at least in theory. + +Note that the pin used for fan monitoring is shared with an alert out +function. Depending on how the board designer wanted to use the chip, fan +speed monitoring will or will not be possible. The proper chip configuration +is left to the BIOS, and the driver will blindly trust it. + +A PWM output can be used to control the speed of the fan. The LM63 has two +PWM modes: manual and automatic. Automatic mode is not fully implemented yet +(you cannot define your custom PWM/temperature curve), and mode change isn't +supported either. + +The lm63 driver will not update its values more frequently than every +second; reading them more often will do no harm, but will return 'old' +values. + diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/chips/lm75 b/Documentation/i2c/chips/lm75 new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8e6356f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/i2c/chips/lm75 @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ +Kernel driver lm75 +================== + +Supported chips: + * National Semiconductor LM75 + Prefix: 'lm75' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4f + Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website + http://www.national.com/ + * Dallas Semiconductor DS75 + Prefix: 'lm75' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4f + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Dallas Semiconductor website + http://www.maxim-ic.com/ + * Dallas Semiconductor DS1775 + Prefix: 'lm75' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4f + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Dallas Semiconductor website + http://www.maxim-ic.com/ + * Maxim MAX6625, MAX6626 + Prefix: 'lm75' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4b + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website + http://www.maxim-ic.com/ + * Microchip (TelCom) TCN75 + Prefix: 'lm75' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4f + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Microchip website + http://www.microchip.com/ + +Author: Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl> + +Description +----------- + +The LM75 implements one temperature sensor. Limits can be set through the +Overtemperature Shutdown register and Hysteresis register. Each value can be +set and read to half-degree accuracy. +An alarm is issued (usually to a connected LM78) when the temperature +gets higher then the Overtemperature Shutdown value; it stays on until +the temperature falls below the Hysteresis value. +All temperatures are in degrees Celsius, and are guaranteed within a +range of -55 to +125 degrees. + +The LM75 only updates its values each 1.5 seconds; reading it more often +will do no harm, but will return 'old' values. + +The LM75 is usually used in combination with LM78-like chips, to measure +the temperature of the processor(s). + +The DS75, DS1775, MAX6625, and MAX6626 are supported as well. +They are not distinguished from an LM75. While most of these chips +have three additional bits of accuracy (12 vs. 9 for the LM75), +the additional bits are not supported. Not only that, but these chips will +not be detected if not in 9-bit precision mode (use the force parameter if +needed). + +The TCN75 is supported as well, and is not distinguished from an LM75. + +The LM75 is essentially an industry standard; there may be other +LM75 clones not listed here, with or without various enhancements, +that are supported. + +The LM77 is not supported, contrary to what we pretended for a long time. +Both chips are simply not compatible, value encoding differs. diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/chips/lm77 b/Documentation/i2c/chips/lm77 new file mode 100644 index 0000000..57c3a46 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/i2c/chips/lm77 @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +Kernel driver lm77 +================== + +Supported chips: + * National Semiconductor LM77 + Prefix: 'lm77' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4b + Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website + http://www.national.com/ + +Author: Andras BALI <drewie@freemail.hu> + +Description +----------- + +The LM77 implements one temperature sensor. The temperature +sensor incorporates a band-gap type temperature sensor, +10-bit ADC, and a digital comparator with user-programmable upper +and lower limit values. + +Limits can be set through the Overtemperature Shutdown register and +Hysteresis register. diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/chips/lm78 b/Documentation/i2c/chips/lm78 new file mode 100644 index 0000000..357086e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/i2c/chips/lm78 @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ +Kernel driver lm78 +================== + +Supported chips: + * National Semiconductor LM78 + Prefix: 'lm78' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x20 - 0x2f, ISA 0x290 (8 I/O ports) + Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website + http://www.national.com/ + * National Semiconductor LM78-J + Prefix: 'lm78-j' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x20 - 0x2f, ISA 0x290 (8 I/O ports) + Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website + http://www.national.com/ + * National Semiconductor LM79 + Prefix: 'lm79' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x20 - 0x2f, ISA 0x290 (8 I/O ports) + Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website + http://www.national.com/ + +Author: Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl> + +Description +----------- + +This driver implements support for the National Semiconductor LM78, LM78-J +and LM79. They are described as 'Microprocessor System Hardware Monitors'. + +There is almost no difference between the three supported chips. Functionally, +the LM78 and LM78-J are exactly identical. The LM79 has one more VID line, +which is used to report the lower voltages newer Pentium processors use. +From here on, LM7* means either of these three types. + +The LM7* implements one temperature sensor, three fan rotation speed sensors, +seven voltage sensors, VID lines, alarms, and some miscellaneous stuff. + +Temperatures are measured in degrees Celsius. An alarm is triggered once +when the Overtemperature Shutdown limit is crossed; it is triggered again +as soon as it drops below the Hysteresis value. A more useful behavior +can be found by setting the Hysteresis value to +127 degrees Celsius; in +this case, alarms are issued during all the time when the actual temperature +is above the Overtemperature Shutdown value. Measurements are guaranteed +between -55 and +125 degrees, with a resolution of 1 degree. + +Fan rotation speeds are reported in RPM (rotations per minute). An alarm is +triggered if the rotation speed has dropped below a programmable limit. Fan +readings can be divided by a programmable divider (1, 2, 4 or 8) to give +the readings more range or accuracy. Not all RPM values can accurately be +represented, so some rounding is done. With a divider of 2, the lowest +representable value is around 2600 RPM. + +Voltage sensors (also known as IN sensors) report their values in volts. +An alarm is triggered if the voltage has crossed a programmable minimum +or maximum limit. Note that minimum in this case always means 'closest to +zero'; this is important for negative voltage measurements. All voltage +inputs can measure voltages between 0 and 4.08 volts, with a resolution +of 0.016 volt. + +The VID lines encode the core voltage value: the voltage level your processor +should work with. This is hardcoded by the mainboard and/or processor itself. +It is a value in volts. When it is unconnected, you will often find the +value 3.50 V here. + +In addition to the alarms described above, there are a couple of additional +ones. There is a BTI alarm, which gets triggered when an external chip has +crossed its limits. Usually, this is connected to all LM75 chips; if at +least one crosses its limits, this bit gets set. The CHAS alarm triggers +if your computer case is open. The FIFO alarms should never trigger; it +indicates an internal error. The SMI_IN alarm indicates some other chip +has triggered an SMI interrupt. As we do not use SMI interrupts at all, +this condition usually indicates there is a problem with some other +device. + +If an alarm triggers, it will remain triggered until the hardware register +is read at least once. This means that the cause for the alarm may +already have disappeared! Note that in the current implementation, all +hardware registers are read whenever any data is read (unless it is less +than 1.5 seconds since the last update). This means that you can easily +miss once-only alarms. + +The LM7* only updates its values each 1.5 seconds; reading it more often +will do no harm, but will return 'old' values. diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/chips/lm80 b/Documentation/i2c/chips/lm80 new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cb5b407 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/i2c/chips/lm80 @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ +Kernel driver lm80 +================== + +Supported chips: + * National Semiconductor LM80 + Prefix: 'lm80' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x28 - 0x2f + Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website + http://www.national.com/ + +Authors: + Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>, + Philip Edelbrock <phil@netroedge.com> + +Description +----------- + +This driver implements support for the National Semiconductor LM80. +It is described as a 'Serial Interface ACPI-Compatible Microprocessor +System Hardware Monitor'. + +The LM80 implements one temperature sensor, two fan rotation speed sensors, +seven voltage sensors, alarms, and some miscellaneous stuff. + +Temperatures are measured in degrees Celsius. There are two sets of limits +which operate independently. When the HOT Temperature Limit is crossed, +this will cause an alarm that will be reasserted until the temperature +drops below the HOT Hysteresis. The Overtemperature Shutdown (OS) limits +should work in the same way (but this must be checked; the datasheet +is unclear about this). Measurements are guaranteed between -55 and ++125 degrees. The current temperature measurement has a resolution of +0.0625 degrees; the limits have a resolution of 1 degree. + +Fan rotation speeds are reported in RPM (rotations per minute). An alarm is +triggered if the rotation speed has dropped below a programmable limit. Fan +readings can be divided by a programmable divider (1, 2, 4 or 8) to give +the readings more range or accuracy. Not all RPM values can accurately be +represented, so some rounding is done. With a divider of 2, the lowest +representable value is around 2600 RPM. + +Voltage sensors (also known as IN sensors) report their values in volts. +An alarm is triggered if the voltage has crossed a programmable minimum +or maximum limit. Note that minimum in this case always means 'closest to +zero'; this is important for negative voltage measurements. All voltage +inputs can measure voltages between 0 and 2.55 volts, with a resolution +of 0.01 volt. + +If an alarm triggers, it will remain triggered until the hardware register +is read at least once. This means that the cause for the alarm may +already have disappeared! Note that in the current implementation, all +hardware registers are read whenever any data is read (unless it is less +than 2.0 seconds since the last update). This means that you can easily +miss once-only alarms. + +The LM80 only updates its values each 1.5 seconds; reading it more often +will do no harm, but will return 'old' values. diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/chips/lm83 b/Documentation/i2c/chips/lm83 new file mode 100644 index 0000000..061d9ed --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/i2c/chips/lm83 @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ +Kernel driver lm83 +================== + +Supported chips: + * National Semiconductor LM83 + Prefix: 'lm83' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 - 0x1a, 0x29 - 0x2b, 0x4c - 0x4e + Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website + http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM83.html + + +Author: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org> + +Description +----------- + +The LM83 is a digital temperature sensor. It senses its own temperature as +well as the temperature of up to three external diodes. It is compatible +with many other devices such as the LM84 and all other ADM1021 clones. +The main difference between the LM83 and the LM84 in that the later can +only sense the temperature of one external diode. + +Using the adm1021 driver for a LM83 should work, but only two temperatures +will be reported instead of four. + +The LM83 is only found on a handful of motherboards. Both a confirmed +list and an unconfirmed list follow. If you can confirm or infirm the +fact that any of these motherboards do actually have an LM83, please +contact us. Note that the LM90 can easily be misdetected as a LM83. + +Confirmed motherboards: + SBS P014 + +Unconfirmed motherboards: + Gigabyte GA-8IK1100 + Iwill MPX2 + Soltek SL-75DRV5 + +The driver has been successfully tested by Magnus Forsström, who I'd +like to thank here. More testers will be of course welcome. + +The fact that the LM83 is only scarcely used can be easily explained. +Most motherboards come with more than just temperature sensors for +health monitoring. They also have voltage and fan rotation speed +sensors. This means that temperature-only chips are usually used as +secondary chips coupled with another chip such as an IT8705F or similar +chip, which provides more features. Since systems usually need three +temperature sensors (motherboard, processor, power supply) and primary +chips provide some temperature sensors, the secondary chip, if needed, +won't have to handle more than two temperatures. Thus, ADM1021 clones +are sufficient, and there is no need for a four temperatures sensor +chip such as the LM83. The only case where using an LM83 would make +sense is on SMP systems, such as the above-mentioned Iwill MPX2, +because you want an additional temperature sensor for each additional +CPU. + +On the SBS P014, this is different, since the LM83 is the only hardware +monitoring chipset. One temperature sensor is used for the motherboard +(actually measuring the LM83's own temperature), one is used for the +CPU. The two other sensors must be used to measure the temperature of +two other points of the motherboard. We suspect these points to be the +north and south bridges, but this couldn't be confirmed. + +All temperature values are given in degrees Celsius. Local temperature +is given within a range of 0 to +85 degrees. Remote temperatures are +given within a range of 0 to +125 degrees. Resolution is 1.0 degree, +accuracy is guaranteed to 3.0 degrees (see the datasheet for more +details). + +Each sensor has its own high limit, but the critical limit is common to +all four sensors. There is no hysteresis mechanism as found on most +recent temperature sensors. + +The lm83 driver will not update its values more frequently than every +other second; reading them more often will do no harm, but will return +'old' values. diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/chips/lm85 b/Documentation/i2c/chips/lm85 new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9549237 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/i2c/chips/lm85 @@ -0,0 +1,221 @@ +Kernel driver lm85 +================== + +Supported chips: + * National Semiconductor LM85 (B and C versions) + Prefix: 'lm85' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e + Datasheet: http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM85.html + * Analog Devices ADM1027 + Prefix: 'adm1027' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e + Datasheet: http://www.analog.com/en/prod/0,,766_825_ADM1027,00.html + * Analog Devices ADT7463 + Prefix: 'adt7463' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e + Datasheet: http://www.analog.com/en/prod/0,,766_825_ADT7463,00.html + * SMSC EMC6D100, SMSC EMC6D101 + Prefix: 'emc6d100' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e + Datasheet: http://www.smsc.com/main/tools/discontinued/6d100.pdf + * SMSC EMC6D102 + Prefix: 'emc6d102' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e + Datasheet: http://www.smsc.com/main/catalog/emc6d102.html + +Authors: + Philip Pokorny <ppokorny@penguincomputing.com>, + Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>, + Richard Barrington <rich_b_nz@clear.net.nz>, + Margit Schubert-While <margitsw@t-online.de>, + Justin Thiessen <jthiessen@penguincomputing.com> + +Description +----------- + +This driver implements support for the National Semiconductor LM85 and +compatible chips including the Analog Devices ADM1027, ADT7463 and +SMSC EMC6D10x chips family. + +The LM85 uses the 2-wire interface compatible with the SMBUS 2.0 +specification. Using an analog to digital converter it measures three (3) +temperatures and five (5) voltages. It has four (4) 16-bit counters for +measuring fan speed. Five (5) digital inputs are provided for sampling the +VID signals from the processor to the VRM. Lastly, there are three (3) PWM +outputs that can be used to control fan speed. + +The voltage inputs have internal scaling resistors so that the following +voltage can be measured without external resistors: + + 2.5V, 3.3V, 5V, 12V, and CPU core voltage (2.25V) + +The temperatures measured are one internal diode, and two remote diodes. +Remote 1 is generally the CPU temperature. These inputs are designed to +measure a thermal diode like the one in a Pentium 4 processor in a socket +423 or socket 478 package. They can also measure temperature using a +transistor like the 2N3904. + +A sophisticated control system for the PWM outputs is designed into the +LM85 that allows fan speed to be adjusted automatically based on any of the +three temperature sensors. Each PWM output is individually adjustable and +programmable. Once configured, the LM85 will adjust the PWM outputs in +response to the measured temperatures without further host intervention. +This feature can also be disabled for manual control of the PWM's. + +Each of the measured inputs (voltage, temperature, fan speed) has +corresponding high/low limit values. The LM85 will signal an ALARM if any +measured value exceeds either limit. + +The LM85 samples all inputs continuously. The lm85 driver will not read +the registers more often than once a second. Further, configuration data is +only read once each 5 minutes. There is twice as much config data as +measurements, so this would seem to be a worthwhile optimization. + +Special Features +---------------- + +The LM85 has four fan speed monitoring modes. The ADM1027 has only two. +Both have special circuitry to compensate for PWM interactions with the +TACH signal from the fans. The ADM1027 can be configured to measure the +speed of a two wire fan, but the input conditioning circuitry is different +for 3-wire and 2-wire mode. For this reason, the 2-wire fan modes are not +exposed to user control. The BIOS should initialize them to the correct +mode. If you've designed your own ADM1027, you'll have to modify the +init_client function and add an insmod parameter to set this up. + +To smooth the response of fans to changes in temperature, the LM85 has an +optional filter for smoothing temperatures. The ADM1027 has the same +config option but uses it to rate limit the changes to fan speed instead. + +The ADM1027 and ADT7463 have a 10-bit ADC and can therefore measure +temperatures with 0.25 degC resolution. They also provide an offset to the +temperature readings that is automatically applied during measurement. +This offset can be used to zero out any errors due to traces and placement. +The documentation says that the offset is in 0.25 degC steps, but in +initial testing of the ADM1027 it was 1.00 degC steps. Analog Devices has +confirmed this "bug". The ADT7463 is reported to work as described in the +documentation. The current lm85 driver does not show the offset register. + +The ADT7463 has a THERM asserted counter. This counter has a 22.76ms +resolution and a range of 5.8 seconds. The driver implements a 32-bit +accumulator of the counter value to extend the range to over a year. The +counter will stay at it's max value until read. + +See the vendor datasheets for more information. There is application note +from National (AN-1260) with some additional information about the LM85. +The Analog Devices datasheet is very detailed and describes a procedure for +determining an optimal configuration for the automatic PWM control. + +The SMSC EMC6D100 & EMC6D101 monitor external voltages, temperatures, and +fan speeds. They use this monitoring capability to alert the system to out +of limit conditions and can automatically control the speeds of multiple +fans in a PC or embedded system. The EMC6D101, available in a 24-pin SSOP +package, and the EMC6D100, available in a 28-pin SSOP package, are designed +to be register compatible. The EMC6D100 offers all the features of the +EMC6D101 plus additional voltage monitoring and system control features. +Unfortunately it is not possible to distinguish between the package +versions on register level so these additional voltage inputs may read +zero. The EMC6D102 features addtional ADC bits thus extending precision +of voltage and temperature channels. + + +Hardware Configurations +----------------------- + +The LM85 can be jumpered for 3 different SMBus addresses. There are +no other hardware configuration options for the LM85. + +The lm85 driver detects both LM85B and LM85C revisions of the chip. See the +datasheet for a complete description of the differences. Other than +identifying the chip, the driver behaves no differently with regard to +these two chips. The LM85B is recommended for new designs. + +The ADM1027 and ADT7463 chips have an optional SMBALERT output that can be +used to signal the chipset in case a limit is exceeded or the temperature +sensors fail. Individual sensor interrupts can be masked so they won't +trigger SMBALERT. The SMBALERT output if configured replaces one of the other +functions (PWM2 or IN0). This functionality is not implemented in current +driver. + +The ADT7463 also has an optional THERM output/input which can be connected +to the processor PROC_HOT output. If available, the autofan control +dynamic Tmin feature can be enabled to keep the system temperature within +spec (just?!) with the least possible fan noise. + +Configuration Notes +------------------- + +Besides standard interfaces driver adds following: + +* Temperatures and Zones + +Each temperature sensor is associated with a Zone. There are three +sensors and therefore three zones (# 1, 2 and 3). Each zone has the following +temperature configuration points: + +* temp#_auto_temp_off - temperature below which fans should be off or spinning very low. +* temp#_auto_temp_min - temperature over which fans start to spin. +* temp#_auto_temp_max - temperature when fans spin at full speed. +* temp#_auto_temp_crit - temperature when all fans will run full speed. + +* PWM Control + +There are three PWM outputs. The LM85 datasheet suggests that the +pwm3 output control both fan3 and fan4. Each PWM can be individually +configured and assigned to a zone for it's control value. Each PWM can be +configured individually according to the following options. + +* pwm#_auto_pwm_min - this specifies the PWM value for temp#_auto_temp_off + temperature. (PWM value from 0 to 255) + +* pwm#_auto_pwm_freq - select base frequency of PWM output. You can select + in range of 10.0 to 94.0 Hz in .1 Hz units. + (Values 100 to 940). + +The pwm#_auto_pwm_freq can be set to one of the following 8 values. Setting the +frequency to a value not on this list, will result in the next higher frequency +being selected. The actual device frequency may vary slightly from this +specification as designed by the manufacturer. Consult the datasheet for more +details. (PWM Frequency values: 100, 150, 230, 300, 380, 470, 620, 940) + +* pwm#_auto_pwm_minctl - this flags selects for temp#_auto_temp_off temperature + the bahaviour of fans. Write 1 to let fans spinning at + pwm#_auto_pwm_min or write 0 to let them off. + +NOTE: It has been reported that there is a bug in the LM85 that causes the flag +to be associated with the zones not the PWMs. This contradicts all the +published documentation. Setting pwm#_min_ctl in this case actually affects all +PWMs controlled by zone '#'. + +* PWM Controlling Zone selection + +* pwm#_auto_channels - controls zone that is associated with PWM + +Configuration choices: + + Value Meaning + ------ ------------------------------------------------ + 1 Controlled by Zone 1 + 2 Controlled by Zone 2 + 3 Controlled by Zone 3 + 23 Controlled by higher temp of Zone 2 or 3 + 123 Controlled by highest temp of Zone 1, 2 or 3 + 0 PWM always 0% (off) + -1 PWM always 100% (full on) + -2 Manual control (write to 'pwm#' to set) + +The National LM85's have two vendor specific configuration +features. Tach. mode and Spinup Control. For more details on these, +see the LM85 datasheet or Application Note AN-1260. + +The Analog Devices ADM1027 has several vendor specific enhancements. +The number of pulses-per-rev of the fans can be set, Tach monitoring +can be optimized for PWM operation, and an offset can be applied to +the temperatures to compensate for systemic errors in the +measurements. + +In addition to the ADM1027 features, the ADT7463 also has Tmin control +and THERM asserted counts. Automatic Tmin control acts to adjust the +Tmin value to maintain the measured temperature sensor at a specified +temperature. There isn't much documentation on this feature in the +ADT7463 data sheet. This is not supported by current driver. diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/chips/lm87 b/Documentation/i2c/chips/lm87 new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c952c57 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/i2c/chips/lm87 @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ +Kernel driver lm87 +================== + +Supported chips: + * National Semiconductor LM87 + Prefix: 'lm87' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c - 0x2f + Datasheet: http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM87.html + +Authors: + Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>, + Philip Edelbrock <phil@netroedge.com>, + Mark Studebaker <mdsxyz123@yahoo.com>, + Stephen Rousset <stephen.rousset@rocketlogix.com>, + Dan Eaton <dan.eaton@rocketlogix.com>, + Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>, + Original 2.6 port Jeff Oliver + +Description +----------- + +This driver implements support for the National Semiconductor LM87. + +The LM87 implements up to three temperature sensors, up to two fan +rotation speed sensors, up to seven voltage sensors, alarms, and some +miscellaneous stuff. + +Temperatures are measured in degrees Celsius. Each input has a high +and low alarm settings. A high limit produces an alarm when the value +goes above it, and an alarm is also produced when the value goes below +the low limit. + +Fan rotation speeds are reported in RPM (rotations per minute). An alarm is +triggered if the rotation speed has dropped below a programmable limit. Fan +readings can be divided by a programmable divider (1, 2, 4 or 8) to give +the readings more range or accuracy. Not all RPM values can accurately be +represented, so some rounding is done. With a divider of 2, the lowest +representable value is around 2600 RPM. + +Voltage sensors (also known as IN sensors) report their values in +volts. An alarm is triggered if the voltage has crossed a programmable +minimum or maximum limit. Note that minimum in this case always means +'closest to zero'; this is important for negative voltage measurements. + +If an alarm triggers, it will remain triggered until the hardware register +is read at least once. This means that the cause for the alarm may +already have disappeared! Note that in the current implementation, all +hardware registers are read whenever any data is read (unless it is less +than 1.0 seconds since the last update). This means that you can easily +miss once-only alarms. + +The lm87 driver only updates its values each 1.0 seconds; reading it more +often will do no harm, but will return 'old' values. + + +Hardware Configurations +----------------------- + +The LM87 has four pins which can serve one of two possible functions, +depending on the hardware configuration. + +Some functions share pins, so not all functions are available at the same +time. Which are depends on the hardware setup. This driver assumes that +the BIOS configured the chip correctly. In that respect, it differs from +the original driver (from lm_sensors for Linux 2.4), which would force the +LM87 to an arbitrary, compile-time chosen mode, regardless of the actual +chipset wiring. + +For reference, here is the list of exclusive functions: + - in0+in5 (default) or temp3 + - fan1 (default) or in6 + - fan2 (default) or in7 + - VID lines (default) or IRQ lines (not handled by this driver) diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/chips/lm90 b/Documentation/i2c/chips/lm90 new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2c4cf39 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/i2c/chips/lm90 @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ +Kernel driver lm90 +================== + +Supported chips: + * National Semiconductor LM90 + Prefix: 'lm90' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c + Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website + http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM90.html + * National Semiconductor LM89 + Prefix: 'lm99' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c and 0x4d + Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website + http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM89.html + * National Semiconductor LM99 + Prefix: 'lm99' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c and 0x4d + Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website + http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM99.html + * National Semiconductor LM86 + Prefix: 'lm86' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c + Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website + http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM86.html + * Analog Devices ADM1032 + Prefix: 'adm1032' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website + http://products.analog.com/products/info.asp?product=ADM1032 + * Analog Devices ADT7461 + Prefix: 'adt7461' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website + http://products.analog.com/products/info.asp?product=ADT7461 + Note: Only if in ADM1032 compatibility mode + * Maxim MAX6657 + Prefix: 'max6657' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website + http://www.maxim-ic.com/quick_view2.cfm/qv_pk/2578 + * Maxim MAX6658 + Prefix: 'max6657' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website + http://www.maxim-ic.com/quick_view2.cfm/qv_pk/2578 + * Maxim MAX6659 + Prefix: 'max6657' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c, 0x4d (unsupported 0x4e) + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website + http://www.maxim-ic.com/quick_view2.cfm/qv_pk/2578 + + +Author: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org> + + +Description +----------- + +The LM90 is a digital temperature sensor. It senses its own temperature as +well as the temperature of up to one external diode. It is compatible +with many other devices such as the LM86, the LM89, the LM99, the ADM1032, +the MAX6657, MAX6658 and the MAX6659 all of which are supported by this driver. +Note that there is no easy way to differentiate between the last three +variants. The extra address and features of the MAX6659 are not supported by +this driver. Additionally, the ADT7461 is supported if found in ADM1032 +compatibility mode. + +The specificity of this family of chipsets over the ADM1021/LM84 +family is that it features critical limits with hysteresis, and an +increased resolution of the remote temperature measurement. + +The different chipsets of the family are not strictly identical, although +very similar. This driver doesn't handle any specific feature for now, +but could if there ever was a need for it. For reference, here comes a +non-exhaustive list of specific features: + +LM90: + * Filter and alert configuration register at 0xBF. + * ALERT is triggered by temperatures over critical limits. + +LM86 and LM89: + * Same as LM90 + * Better external channel accuracy + +LM99: + * Same as LM89 + * External temperature shifted by 16 degrees down + +ADM1032: + * Consecutive alert register at 0x22. + * Conversion averaging. + * Up to 64 conversions/s. + * ALERT is triggered by open remote sensor. + +ADT7461 + * Extended temperature range (breaks compatibility) + * Lower resolution for remote temperature + +MAX6657 and MAX6658: + * Remote sensor type selection + +MAX6659 + * Selectable address + * Second critical temperature limit + * Remote sensor type selection + +All temperature values are given in degrees Celsius. Resolution +is 1.0 degree for the local temperature, 0.125 degree for the remote +temperature. + +Each sensor has its own high and low limits, plus a critical limit. +Additionally, there is a relative hysteresis value common to both critical +values. To make life easier to user-space applications, two absolute values +are exported, one for each channel, but these values are of course linked. +Only the local hysteresis can be set from user-space, and the same delta +applies to the remote hysteresis. + +The lm90 driver will not update its values more frequently than every +other second; reading them more often will do no harm, but will return +'old' values. + diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/chips/lm92 b/Documentation/i2c/chips/lm92 new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7705bfa --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/i2c/chips/lm92 @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ +Kernel driver lm92 +================== + +Supported chips: + * National Semiconductor LM92 + Prefix: 'lm92' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4b + Datasheet: http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM92.html + * National Semiconductor LM76 + Prefix: 'lm92' + Addresses scanned: none, force parameter needed + Datasheet: http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM76.html + * Maxim MAX6633/MAX6634/MAX6635 + Prefix: 'lm92' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4b + MAX6633 with address in 0x40 - 0x47, 0x4c - 0x4f needs force parameter + and MAX6634 with address in 0x4c - 0x4f needs force parameter + Datasheet: http://www.maxim-ic.com/quick_view2.cfm/qv_pk/3074 + +Authors: + Abraham van der Merwe <abraham@2d3d.co.za> + Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org> + + +Description +----------- + +This driver implements support for the National Semiconductor LM92 +temperature sensor. + +Each LM92 temperature sensor supports a single temperature sensor. There are +alarms for high, low, and critical thresholds. There's also an hysteresis to +control the thresholds for resetting alarms. + +Support was added later for the LM76 and Maxim MAX6633/MAX6634/MAX6635, +which are mostly compatible. They have not all been tested, so you +may need to use the force parameter. diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/chips/max1619 b/Documentation/i2c/chips/max1619 new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d6f8d9c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/i2c/chips/max1619 @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ +Kernel driver max1619 +===================== + +Supported chips: + * Maxim MAX1619 + Prefix: 'max1619' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18-0x1a, 0x29-0x2b, 0x4c-0x4e + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website + http://pdfserv.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX1619.pdf + +Authors: + Alexey Fisher <fishor@mail.ru>, + Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org> + +Description +----------- + +The MAX1619 is a digital temperature sensor. It senses its own temperature as +well as the temperature of up to one external diode. + +All temperature values are given in degrees Celsius. Resolution +is 1.0 degree for the local temperature and for the remote temperature. + +Only the external sensor has high and low limits. + +The max1619 driver will not update its values more frequently than every +other second; reading them more often will do no harm, but will return +'old' values. + diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/chips/max6875 b/Documentation/i2c/chips/max6875 new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b4fb49b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/i2c/chips/max6875 @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ +Kernel driver max6875 +===================== + +Supported chips: + * Maxim max6874, max6875 + Prefixes: 'max6875' + Addresses scanned: 0x50, 0x52 + Datasheets: + http://pdfserv.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX6874-MAX6875.pdf + +Author: Ben Gardner <bgardner@wabtec.com> + + +Module Parameters +----------------- + +* allow_write int + Set to non-zero to enable write permission: + *0: Read only + 1: Read and write + + +Description +----------- + +The MAXIM max6875 is a EEPROM-programmable power-supply sequencer/supervisor. +It provides timed outputs that can be used as a watchdog, if properly wired. +It also provides 512 bytes of user EEPROM. + +At reset, the max6875 reads the configuration eeprom into its configuration +registers. The chip then begins to operate according to the values in the +registers. + +See the datasheet for details on how to program the EEPROM. + + +Sysfs entries +------------- + +eeprom_user - 512 bytes of user-defined EEPROM space. Only writable if + allow_write was set and register 0x43 is 0. + +eeprom_config - 70 bytes of config EEPROM. Note that changes will not get + loaded into register space until a power cycle or device reset. + +reg_config - 70 bytes of register space. Any changes take affect immediately. + + +General Remarks +--------------- + +A typical application will require that the EEPROMs be programmed once and +never altered afterwards. + diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/chips/pc87360 b/Documentation/i2c/chips/pc87360 new file mode 100644 index 0000000..89a8fcf --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/i2c/chips/pc87360 @@ -0,0 +1,189 @@ +Kernel driver pc87360 +===================== + +Supported chips: + * National Semiconductor PC87360, PC87363, PC87364, PC87365 and PC87366 + Prefixes: 'pc87360', 'pc87363', 'pc87364', 'pc87365', 'pc87366' + Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space + Datasheets: + http://www.national.com/pf/PC/PC87360.html + http://www.national.com/pf/PC/PC87363.html + http://www.national.com/pf/PC/PC87364.html + http://www.national.com/pf/PC/PC87365.html + http://www.national.com/pf/PC/PC87366.html + +Authors: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org> + +Thanks to Sandeep Mehta, Tonko de Rooy and Daniel Ceregatti for testing. +Thanks to Rudolf Marek for helping me investigate conversion issues. + + +Module Parameters +----------------- + +* init int + Chip initialization level: + 0: None + *1: Forcibly enable internal voltage and temperature channels, except in9 + 2: Forcibly enable all voltage and temperature channels, except in9 + 3: Forcibly enable all voltage and temperature channels, including in9 + +Note that this parameter has no effect for the PC87360, PC87363 and PC87364 +chips. + +Also note that for the PC87366, initialization levels 2 and 3 don't enable +all temperature channels, because some of them share pins with each other, +so they can't be used at the same time. + + +Description +----------- + +The National Semiconductor PC87360 Super I/O chip contains monitoring and +PWM control circuitry for two fans. The PC87363 chip is similar, and the +PC87364 chip has monitoring and PWM control for a third fan. + +The National Semiconductor PC87365 and PC87366 Super I/O chips are complete +hardware monitoring chipsets, not only controlling and monitoring three fans, +but also monitoring eleven voltage inputs and two (PC87365) or up to four +(PC87366) temperatures. + + Chip #vin #fan #pwm #temp devid + + PC87360 - 2 2 - 0xE1 + PC87363 - 2 2 - 0xE8 + PC87364 - 3 3 - 0xE4 + PC87365 11 3 3 2 0xE5 + PC87366 11 3 3 3-4 0xE9 + +The driver assumes that no more than one chip is present, and one of the +standard Super I/O addresses is used (0x2E/0x2F or 0x4E/0x4F) + +Fan Monitoring +-------------- + +Fan rotation speeds are reported in RPM (revolutions per minute). An alarm +is triggered if the rotation speed has dropped below a programmable limit. +A different alarm is triggered if the fan speed is too low to be measured. + +Fan readings are affected by a programmable clock divider, giving the +readings more range or accuracy. Usually, users have to learn how it works, +but this driver implements dynamic clock divider selection, so you don't +have to care no more. + +For reference, here are a few values about clock dividers: + + slowest accuracy highest + measurable around 3000 accurate + divider speed (RPM) RPM (RPM) speed (RPM) + 1 1882 18 6928 + 2 941 37 4898 + 4 470 74 3464 + 8 235 150 2449 + +For the curious, here is how the values above were computed: + * slowest measurable speed: clock/(255*divider) + * accuracy around 3000 RPM: 3000^2/clock + * highest accurate speed: sqrt(clock*100) +The clock speed for the PC87360 family is 480 kHz. I arbitrarily chose 100 +RPM as the lowest acceptable accuracy. + +As mentioned above, you don't have to care about this no more. + +Note that not all RPM values can be represented, even when the best clock +divider is selected. This is not only true for the measured speeds, but +also for the programmable low limits, so don't be surprised if you try to +set, say, fan1_min to 2900 and it finally reads 2909. + + +Fan Control +----------- + +PWM (pulse width modulation) values range from 0 to 255, with 0 meaning +that the fan is stopped, and 255 meaning that the fan goes at full speed. + +Be extremely careful when changing PWM values. Low PWM values, even +non-zero, can stop the fan, which may cause irreversible damage to your +hardware if temperature increases too much. When changing PWM values, go +step by step and keep an eye on temperatures. + +One user reported problems with PWM. Changing PWM values would break fan +speed readings. No explanation nor fix could be found. + + +Temperature Monitoring +---------------------- + +Temperatures are reported in degrees Celsius. Each temperature measured has +associated low, high and overtemperature limits, each of which triggers an +alarm when crossed. + +The first two temperature channels are external. The third one (PC87366 +only) is internal. + +The PC87366 has three additional temperature channels, based on +thermistors (as opposed to thermal diodes for the first three temperature +channels). For technical reasons, these channels are held by the VLM +(voltage level monitor) logical device, not the TMS (temperature +measurement) one. As a consequence, these temperatures are exported as +voltages, and converted into temperatures in user-space. + +Note that these three additional channels share their pins with the +external thermal diode channels, so you (physically) can't use them all at +the same time. Although it should be possible to mix the two sensor types, +the documents from National Semiconductor suggest that motherboard +manufacturers should choose one type and stick to it. So you will more +likely have either channels 1 to 3 (thermal diodes) or 3 to 6 (internal +thermal diode, and thermistors). + + +Voltage Monitoring +------------------ + +Voltages are reported relatively to a reference voltage, either internal or +external. Some of them (in7:Vsb, in8:Vdd and in10:AVdd) are divided by two +internally, you will have to compensate in sensors.conf. Others (in0 to in6) +are likely to be divided externally. The meaning of each of these inputs as +well as the values of the resistors used for division is left to the +motherboard manufacturers, so you will have to document yourself and edit +sensors.conf accordingly. National Semiconductor has a document with +recommended resistor values for some voltages, but this still leaves much +room for per motherboard specificities, unfortunately. Even worse, +motherboard manufacturers don't seem to care about National Semiconductor's +recommendations. + +Each voltage measured has associated low and high limits, each of which +triggers an alarm when crossed. + +When available, VID inputs are used to provide the nominal CPU Core voltage. +The driver will default to VRM 9.0, but this can be changed from user-space. +The chipsets can handle two sets of VID inputs (on dual-CPU systems), but +the driver will only export one for now. This may change later if there is +a need. + + +General Remarks +--------------- + +If an alarm triggers, it will remain triggered until the hardware register +is read at least once. This means that the cause for the alarm may already +have disappeared! Note that all hardware registers are read whenever any +data is read (unless it is less than 2 seconds since the last update, in +which case cached values are returned instead). As a consequence, when +a once-only alarm triggers, it may take 2 seconds for it to show, and 2 +more seconds for it to disappear. + +Monitoring of in9 isn't enabled at lower init levels (<3) because that +channel measures the battery voltage (Vbat). It is a known fact that +repeatedly sampling the battery voltage reduces its lifetime. National +Semiconductor smartly designed their chipset so that in9 is sampled only +once every 1024 sampling cycles (that is every 34 minutes at the default +sampling rate), so the effect is attenuated, but still present. + + +Limitations +----------- + +The datasheets suggests that some values (fan mins, fan dividers) +shouldn't be changed once the monitoring has started, but we ignore that +recommendation. We'll reconsider if it actually causes trouble. diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/chips/pca9539 b/Documentation/i2c/chips/pca9539 new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c4fce6a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/i2c/chips/pca9539 @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ +Kernel driver pca9539 +===================== + +Supported chips: + * Philips PCA9539 + Prefix: 'pca9539' + Addresses scanned: 0x74 - 0x77 + Datasheet: + http://www.semiconductors.philips.com/acrobat/datasheets/PCA9539_2.pdf + +Author: Ben Gardner <bgardner@wabtec.com> + + +Description +----------- + +The Philips PCA9539 is a 16 bit low power I/O device. +All 16 lines can be individually configured as an input or output. +The input sense can also be inverted. +The 16 lines are split between two bytes. + + +Sysfs entries +------------- + +Each is a byte that maps to the 8 I/O bits. +A '0' suffix is for bits 0-7, while '1' is for bits 8-15. + +input[01] - read the current value +output[01] - sets the output value +direction[01] - direction of each bit: 1=input, 0=output +invert[01] - toggle the input bit sense + +input reads the actual state of the line and is always available. +The direction defaults to input for all channels. + + +General Remarks +--------------- + +Note that each output, direction, and invert entry controls 8 lines. +You should use the read, modify, write sequence. +For example. to set output bit 0 of 1. + val=$(cat output0) + val=$(( $val | 1 )) + echo $val > output0 + diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/chips/pcf8574 b/Documentation/i2c/chips/pcf8574 new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2752c8c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/i2c/chips/pcf8574 @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ +Kernel driver pcf8574 +===================== + +Supported chips: + * Philips PCF8574 + Prefix: 'pcf8574' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x20 - 0x27 + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Philips Semiconductors website + http://www.semiconductors.philips.com/pip/PCF8574P.html + + * Philips PCF8574A + Prefix: 'pcf8574a' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x38 - 0x3f + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Philips Semiconductors website + http://www.semiconductors.philips.com/pip/PCF8574P.html + +Authors: + Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>, + Philip Edelbrock <phil@netroedge.com>, + Dan Eaton <dan.eaton@rocketlogix.com>, + Aurelien Jarno <aurelien@aurel32.net>, + Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>, + + +Description +----------- +The PCF8574(A) is an 8-bit I/O expander for the I2C bus produced by Philips +Semiconductors. It is designed to provide a byte I2C interface to up to 16 +separate devices (8 x PCF8574 and 8 x PCF8574A). + +This device consists of a quasi-bidirectional port. Each of the eight I/Os +can be independently used as an input or output. To setup an I/O as an +input, you have to write a 1 to the corresponding output. + +For more informations see the datasheet. + + +Accessing PCF8574(A) via /sys interface +------------------------------------- + +! Be careful ! +The PCF8574(A) is plainly impossible to detect ! Stupid chip. +So every chip with address in the interval [20..27] and [38..3f] are +detected as PCF8574(A). If you have other chips in this address +range, the workaround is to load this module after the one +for your others chips. + +On detection (i.e. insmod, modprobe et al.), directories are being +created for each detected PCF8574(A): + +/sys/bus/i2c/devices/<0>-<1>/ +where <0> is the bus the chip was detected on (e. g. i2c-0) +and <1> the chip address ([20..27] or [38..3f]): + +(example: /sys/bus/i2c/devices/1-0020/) + +Inside these directories, there are two files each: +read and write (and one file with chip name). + +The read file is read-only. Reading gives you the current I/O input +if the corresponding output is set as 1, otherwise the current output +value, that is to say 0. + +The write file is read/write. Writing a value outputs it on the I/O +port. Reading returns the last written value. + +On module initialization the chip is configured as eight inputs (all +outputs to 1), so you can connect any circuit to the PCF8574(A) without +being afraid of short-circuit. diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/chips/pcf8591 b/Documentation/i2c/chips/pcf8591 new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5628fcf --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/i2c/chips/pcf8591 @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ +Kernel driver pcf8591 +===================== + +Supported chips: + * Philips PCF8591 + Prefix: 'pcf8591' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4f + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Philips Semiconductor website + http://www.semiconductors.philips.com/pip/PCF8591P.html + +Authors: + Aurelien Jarno <aurelien@aurel32.net> + valuable contributions by Jan M. Sendler <sendler@sendler.de>, + Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org> + + +Description +----------- +The PCF8591 is an 8-bit A/D and D/A converter (4 analog inputs and one +analog output) for the I2C bus produced by Philips Semiconductors. It +is designed to provide a byte I2C interface to up to 4 separate devices. + +The PCF8591 has 4 analog inputs programmable as single-ended or +differential inputs : +- mode 0 : four single ended inputs + Pins AIN0 to AIN3 are single ended inputs for channels 0 to 3 + +- mode 1 : three differential inputs + Pins AIN3 is the common negative differential input + Pins AIN0 to AIN2 are positive differential inputs for channels 0 to 2 + +- mode 2 : single ended and differential mixed + Pins AIN0 and AIN1 are single ended inputs for channels 0 and 1 + Pins AIN2 is the positive differential input for channel 3 + Pins AIN3 is the negative differential input for channel 3 + +- mode 3 : two differential inputs + Pins AIN0 is the positive differential input for channel 0 + Pins AIN1 is the negative differential input for channel 0 + Pins AIN2 is the positive differential input for channel 1 + Pins AIN3 is the negative differential input for channel 1 + +See the datasheet for details. + +Module parameters +----------------- + +* input_mode int + + Analog input mode: + 0 = four single ended inputs + 1 = three differential inputs + 2 = single ended and differential mixed + 3 = two differential inputs + + +Accessing PCF8591 via /sys interface +------------------------------------- + +! Be careful ! +The PCF8591 is plainly impossible to detect ! Stupid chip. +So every chip with address in the interval [48..4f] is +detected as PCF8591. If you have other chips in this address +range, the workaround is to load this module after the one +for your others chips. + +On detection (i.e. insmod, modprobe et al.), directories are being +created for each detected PCF8591: + +/sys/bus/devices/<0>-<1>/ +where <0> is the bus the chip was detected on (e. g. i2c-0) +and <1> the chip address ([48..4f]) + +Inside these directories, there are such files: +in0, in1, in2, in3, out0_enable, out0_output, name + +Name contains chip name. + +The in0, in1, in2 and in3 files are RO. Reading gives the value of the +corresponding channel. Depending on the current analog inputs configuration, +files in2 and/or in3 do not exist. Values range are from 0 to 255 for single +ended inputs and -128 to +127 for differential inputs (8-bit ADC). + +The out0_enable file is RW. Reading gives "1" for analog output enabled and +"0" for analog output disabled. Writing accepts "0" and "1" accordingly. + +The out0_output file is RW. Writing a number between 0 and 255 (8-bit DAC), send +the value to the digital-to-analog converter. Note that a voltage will +only appears on AOUT pin if aout0_enable equals 1. Reading returns the last +value written. diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/chips/sis5595 b/Documentation/i2c/chips/sis5595 new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b7ae36b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/i2c/chips/sis5595 @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ +Kernel driver sis5595 +===================== + +Supported chips: + * Silicon Integrated Systems Corp. SiS5595 Southbridge Hardware Monitor + Prefix: 'sis5595' + Addresses scanned: ISA in PCI-space encoded address + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Silicon Integrated Systems Corp. site. + +Authors: + Kyösti Mälkki <kmalkki@cc.hut.fi>, + Mark D. Studebaker <mdsxyz123@yahoo.com>, + Aurelien Jarno <aurelien@aurel32.net> 2.6 port + + SiS southbridge has a LM78-like chip integrated on the same IC. + This driver is a customized copy of lm78.c + + Supports following revisions: + Version PCI ID PCI Revision + 1 1039/0008 AF or less + 2 1039/0008 B0 or greater + + Note: these chips contain a 0008 device which is incompatible with the + 5595. We recognize these by the presence of the listed + "blacklist" PCI ID and refuse to load. + + NOT SUPPORTED PCI ID BLACKLIST PCI ID + 540 0008 0540 + 550 0008 0550 + 5513 0008 5511 + 5581 0008 5597 + 5582 0008 5597 + 5597 0008 5597 + 630 0008 0630 + 645 0008 0645 + 730 0008 0730 + 735 0008 0735 + + +Module Parameters +----------------- +force_addr=0xaddr Set the I/O base address. Useful for boards + that don't set the address in the BIOS. Does not do a + PCI force; the device must still be present in lspci. + Don't use this unless the driver complains that the + base address is not set. + Example: 'modprobe sis5595 force_addr=0x290' + + +Description +----------- + +The SiS5595 southbridge has integrated hardware monitor functions. It also +has an I2C bus, but this driver only supports the hardware monitor. For the +I2C bus driver see i2c-sis5595. + +The SiS5595 implements zero or one temperature sensor, two fan speed +sensors, four or five voltage sensors, and alarms. + +On the first version of the chip, there are four voltage sensors and one +temperature sensor. + +On the second version of the chip, the temperature sensor (temp) and the +fifth voltage sensor (in4) share a pin which is configurable, but not +through the driver. Sorry. The driver senses the configuration of the pin, +which was hopefully set by the BIOS. + +Temperatures are measured in degrees Celsius. An alarm is triggered once +when the max is crossed; it is also triggered when it drops below the min +value. Measurements are guaranteed between -55 and +125 degrees, with a +resolution of 1 degree. + +Fan rotation speeds are reported in RPM (rotations per minute). An alarm is +triggered if the rotation speed has dropped below a programmable limit. Fan +readings can be divided by a programmable divider (1, 2, 4 or 8) to give +the readings more range or accuracy. Not all RPM values can accurately be +represented, so some rounding is done. With a divider of 2, the lowest +representable value is around 2600 RPM. + +Voltage sensors (also known as IN sensors) report their values in volts. An +alarm is triggered if the voltage has crossed a programmable minimum or +maximum limit. Note that minimum in this case always means 'closest to +zero'; this is important for negative voltage measurements. All voltage +inputs can measure voltages between 0 and 4.08 volts, with a resolution of +0.016 volt. + +In addition to the alarms described above, there is a BTI alarm, which gets +triggered when an external chip has crossed its limits. Usually, this is +connected to some LM75-like chip; if at least one crosses its limits, this +bit gets set. + +If an alarm triggers, it will remain triggered until the hardware register +is read at least once. This means that the cause for the alarm may already +have disappeared! Note that in the current implementation, all hardware +registers are read whenever any data is read (unless it is less than 1.5 +seconds since the last update). This means that you can easily miss +once-only alarms. + +The SiS5595 only updates its values each 1.5 seconds; reading it more often +will do no harm, but will return 'old' values. + +Problems +-------- +Some chips refuse to be enabled. We don't know why. +The driver will recognize this and print a message in dmesg. + diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/chips/smsc47b397.txt b/Documentation/i2c/chips/smsc47b397 index 389edae..da9d80c 100644 --- a/Documentation/i2c/chips/smsc47b397.txt +++ b/Documentation/i2c/chips/smsc47b397 @@ -1,7 +1,19 @@ +Kernel driver smsc47b397 +======================== + +Supported chips: + * SMSC LPC47B397-NC + Prefix: 'smsc47b397' + Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space + Datasheet: In this file + +Authors: Mark M. Hoffman <mhoffman@lightlink.com> + Utilitek Systems, Inc. + November 23, 2004 The following specification describes the SMSC LPC47B397-NC sensor chip -(for which there is no public datasheet available). This document was +(for which there is no public datasheet available). This document was provided by Craig Kelly (In-Store Broadcast Network) and edited/corrected by Mark M. Hoffman <mhoffman@lightlink.com>. @@ -10,10 +22,10 @@ by Mark M. Hoffman <mhoffman@lightlink.com>. Methods for detecting the HP SIO and reading the thermal data on a dc7100. The thermal information on the dc7100 is contained in the SIO Hardware Monitor -(HWM). The information is accessed through an index/data pair. The index/data -pair is located at the HWM Base Address + 0 and the HWM Base Address + 1. The +(HWM). The information is accessed through an index/data pair. The index/data +pair is located at the HWM Base Address + 0 and the HWM Base Address + 1. The HWM Base address can be obtained from Logical Device 8, registers 0x60 (MSB) -and 0x61 (LSB). Currently we are using 0x480 for the HWM Base Address and +and 0x61 (LSB). Currently we are using 0x480 for the HWM Base Address and 0x480 and 0x481 for the index/data pair. Reading temperature information. @@ -50,7 +62,7 @@ Reading the tach LSB locks the tach MSB. The LSB Must be read first. How to convert the tach reading to RPM. -The tach reading (TCount) is given by: (Tach MSB * 256) + (Tach LSB) +The tach reading (TCount) is given by: (Tach MSB * 256) + (Tach LSB) The SIO counts the number of 90kHz (11.111us) pulses per revolution. RPM = 60/(TCount * 11.111us) @@ -72,20 +84,20 @@ To program the configuration registers, the following sequence must be followed: Enter Configuration Mode To place the chip into the Configuration State The config key (0x55) is written -to the CONFIG PORT (0x2E). +to the CONFIG PORT (0x2E). Configuration Mode In configuration mode, the INDEX PORT is located at the CONFIG PORT address and the DATA PORT is at INDEX PORT address + 1. -The desired configuration registers are accessed in two steps: +The desired configuration registers are accessed in two steps: a. Write the index of the Logical Device Number Configuration Register (i.e., 0x07) to the INDEX PORT and then write the number of the desired logical device to the DATA PORT. b. Write the address of the desired configuration register within the logical device to the INDEX PORT and then write or read the config- - uration register through the DATA PORT. + uration register through the DATA PORT. Note: If accessing the Global Configuration Registers, step (a) is not required. @@ -96,18 +108,18 @@ The chip returns to the RUN State. (This is important). Programming Example The following is an example of how to read the SIO Device ID located at 0x20 -; ENTER CONFIGURATION MODE +; ENTER CONFIGURATION MODE MOV DX,02EH MOV AX,055H OUT DX,AL -; GLOBAL CONFIGURATION REGISTER +; GLOBAL CONFIGURATION REGISTER MOV DX,02EH MOV AL,20H -OUT DX,AL +OUT DX,AL ; READ THE DATA MOV DX,02FH IN AL,DX -; EXIT CONFIGURATION MODE +; EXIT CONFIGURATION MODE MOV DX,02EH MOV AX,0AAH OUT DX,AL @@ -122,12 +134,12 @@ Obtaining the HWM Base Address. The following is an example of how to read the HWM Base Address located in Logical Device 8. -; ENTER CONFIGURATION MODE +; ENTER CONFIGURATION MODE MOV DX,02EH MOV AX,055H OUT DX,AL -; CONFIGURE REGISTER CRE0, -; LOGICAL DEVICE 8 +; CONFIGURE REGISTER CRE0, +; LOGICAL DEVICE 8 MOV DX,02EH MOV AL,07H OUT DX,AL ;Point to LD# Config Reg @@ -135,12 +147,12 @@ MOV DX,02FH MOV AL, 08H OUT DX,AL;Point to Logical Device 8 ; -MOV DX,02EH +MOV DX,02EH MOV AL,60H OUT DX,AL ; Point to HWM Base Addr MSB MOV DX,02FH IN AL,DX ; Get MSB of HWM Base Addr -; EXIT CONFIGURATION MODE +; EXIT CONFIGURATION MODE MOV DX,02EH MOV AX,0AAH OUT DX,AL diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/chips/smsc47m1 b/Documentation/i2c/chips/smsc47m1 new file mode 100644 index 0000000..34e6478 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/i2c/chips/smsc47m1 @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +Kernel driver smsc47m1 +====================== + +Supported chips: + * SMSC LPC47B27x, LPC47M10x, LPC47M13x, LPC47M14x, LPC47M15x and LPC47M192 + Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space + Prefix: 'smsc47m1' + Datasheets: + http://www.smsc.com/main/datasheets/47b27x.pdf + http://www.smsc.com/main/datasheets/47m10x.pdf + http://www.smsc.com/main/tools/discontinued/47m13x.pdf + http://www.smsc.com/main/datasheets/47m14x.pdf + http://www.smsc.com/main/tools/discontinued/47m15x.pdf + http://www.smsc.com/main/datasheets/47m192.pdf + +Authors: + Mark D. Studebaker <mdsxyz123@yahoo.com>, + With assistance from Bruce Allen <ballen@uwm.edu>, and his + fan.c program: http://www.lsc-group.phys.uwm.edu/%7Eballen/driver/ + Gabriele Gorla <gorlik@yahoo.com>, + Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org> + +Description +----------- + +The Standard Microsystems Corporation (SMSC) 47M1xx Super I/O chips +contain monitoring and PWM control circuitry for two fans. + +The 47M15x and 47M192 chips contain a full 'hardware monitoring block' +in addition to the fan monitoring and control. The hardware monitoring +block is not supported by the driver. + +Fan rotation speeds are reported in RPM (rotations per minute). An alarm is +triggered if the rotation speed has dropped below a programmable limit. Fan +readings can be divided by a programmable divider (1, 2, 4 or 8) to give +the readings more range or accuracy. Not all RPM values can accurately be +represented, so some rounding is done. With a divider of 2, the lowest +representable value is around 2600 RPM. + +PWM values are from 0 to 255. + +If an alarm triggers, it will remain triggered until the hardware register +is read at least once. This means that the cause for the alarm may +already have disappeared! Note that in the current implementation, all +hardware registers are read whenever any data is read (unless it is less +than 1.5 seconds since the last update). This means that you can easily +miss once-only alarms. + + +********************** +The lm_sensors project gratefully acknowledges the support of +Intel in the development of this driver. diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/chips/via686a b/Documentation/i2c/chips/via686a new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b82014c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/i2c/chips/via686a @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ +Kernel driver via686a +===================== + +Supported chips: + * Via VT82C686A, VT82C686B Southbridge Integrated Hardware Monitor + Prefix: 'via686a' + Addresses scanned: ISA in PCI-space encoded address + Datasheet: On request through web form (http://www.via.com.tw/en/support/datasheets/) + +Authors: + Kyösti Mälkki <kmalkki@cc.hut.fi>, + Mark D. Studebaker <mdsxyz123@yahoo.com> + Bob Dougherty <bobd@stanford.edu> + (Some conversion-factor data were contributed by + Jonathan Teh Soon Yew <j.teh@iname.com> + and Alex van Kaam <darkside@chello.nl>.) + +Module Parameters +----------------- + +force_addr=0xaddr Set the I/O base address. Useful for Asus A7V boards + that don't set the address in the BIOS. Does not do a + PCI force; the via686a must still be present in lspci. + Don't use this unless the driver complains that the + base address is not set. + Example: 'modprobe via686a force_addr=0x6000' + +Description +----------- + +The driver does not distinguish between the chips and reports +all as a 686A. + +The Via 686a southbridge has integrated hardware monitor functionality. +It also has an I2C bus, but this driver only supports the hardware monitor. +For the I2C bus driver, see <file:Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-viapro> + +The Via 686a implements three temperature sensors, two fan rotation speed +sensors, five voltage sensors and alarms. + +Temperatures are measured in degrees Celsius. An alarm is triggered once +when the Overtemperature Shutdown limit is crossed; it is triggered again +as soon as it drops below the hysteresis value. + +Fan rotation speeds are reported in RPM (rotations per minute). An alarm is +triggered if the rotation speed has dropped below a programmable limit. Fan +readings can be divided by a programmable divider (1, 2, 4 or 8) to give +the readings more range or accuracy. Not all RPM values can accurately be +represented, so some rounding is done. With a divider of 2, the lowest +representable value is around 2600 RPM. + +Voltage sensors (also known as IN sensors) report their values in volts. +An alarm is triggered if the voltage has crossed a programmable minimum +or maximum limit. Voltages are internally scalled, so each voltage channel +has a different resolution and range. + +If an alarm triggers, it will remain triggered until the hardware register +is read at least once. This means that the cause for the alarm may +already have disappeared! Note that in the current implementation, all +hardware registers are read whenever any data is read (unless it is less +than 1.5 seconds since the last update). This means that you can easily +miss once-only alarms. + +The driver only updates its values each 1.5 seconds; reading it more often +will do no harm, but will return 'old' values. diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/chips/w83627hf b/Documentation/i2c/chips/w83627hf new file mode 100644 index 0000000..78f37c2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/i2c/chips/w83627hf @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +Kernel driver w83627hf +====================== + +Supported chips: + * Winbond W83627HF (ISA accesses ONLY) + Prefix: 'w83627hf' + Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers + Datasheet: http://www.winbond.com/PDF/sheet/w83627hf.pdf + * Winbond W83627THF + Prefix: 'w83627thf' + Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers + Datasheet: http://www.winbond.com/PDF/sheet/w83627thf.pdf + * Winbond W83697HF + Prefix: 'w83697hf' + Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers + Datasheet: http://www.winbond.com/PDF/sheet/697hf.pdf + * Winbond W83637HF + Prefix: 'w83637hf' + Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers + Datasheet: http://www.winbond.com/PDF/sheet/w83637hf.pdf + +Authors: + Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>, + Philip Edelbrock <phil@netroedge.com>, + Mark Studebaker <mdsxyz123@yahoo.com>, + Bernhard C. Schrenk <clemy@clemy.org> + +Module Parameters +----------------- + +* force_addr: int + Initialize the ISA address of the sensors +* force_i2c: int + Initialize the I2C address of the sensors +* init: int + (default is 1) + Use 'init=0' to bypass initializing the chip. + Try this if your computer crashes when you load the module. + +Description +----------- + +This driver implements support for ISA accesses *only* for +the Winbond W83627HF, W83627THF, W83697HF and W83637HF Super I/O chips. +We will refer to them collectively as Winbond chips. + +This driver supports ISA accesses, which should be more reliable +than i2c accesses. Also, for Tyan boards which contain both a +Super I/O chip and a second i2c-only Winbond chip (often a W83782D), +using this driver will avoid i2c address conflicts and complex +initialization that were required in the w83781d driver. + +If you really want i2c accesses for these Super I/O chips, +use the w83781d driver. However this is not the preferred method +now that this ISA driver has been developed. + +Technically, the w83627thf does not support a VID reading. However, it's +possible or even likely that your mainboard maker has routed these signals +to a specific set of general purpose IO pins (the Asus P4C800-E is one such +board). The w83627thf driver now interprets these as VID. If the VID on +your board doesn't work, first see doc/vid in the lm_sensors package. If +that still doesn't help, email us at lm-sensors@lm-sensors.org. + +For further information on this driver see the w83781d driver +documentation. + diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/chips/w83781d b/Documentation/i2c/chips/w83781d new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e545933 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/i2c/chips/w83781d @@ -0,0 +1,402 @@ +Kernel driver w83781d +===================== + +Supported chips: + * Winbond W83781D + Prefix: 'w83781d' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x20 - 0x2f, ISA 0x290 (8 I/O ports) + Datasheet: http://www.winbond-usa.com/products/winbond_products/pdfs/PCIC/w83781d.pdf + * Winbond W83782D + Prefix: 'w83782d' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x20 - 0x2f, ISA 0x290 (8 I/O ports) + Datasheet: http://www.winbond.com/PDF/sheet/w83782d.pdf + * Winbond W83783S + Prefix: 'w83783s' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2d + Datasheet: http://www.winbond-usa.com/products/winbond_products/pdfs/PCIC/w83783s.pdf + * Winbond W83627HF + Prefix: 'w83627hf' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x20 - 0x2f, ISA 0x290 (8 I/O ports) + Datasheet: http://www.winbond.com/PDF/sheet/w83627hf.pdf + * Asus AS99127F + Prefix: 'as99127f' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x28 - 0x2f + Datasheet: Unavailable from Asus + +Authors: + Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>, + Philip Edelbrock <phil@netroedge.com>, + Mark Studebaker <mdsxyz123@yahoo.com> + +Module parameters +----------------- + +* init int + (default 1) + Use 'init=0' to bypass initializing the chip. + Try this if your computer crashes when you load the module. + +force_subclients=bus,caddr,saddr,saddr + This is used to force the i2c addresses for subclients of + a certain chip. Typical usage is `force_subclients=0,0x2d,0x4a,0x4b' + to force the subclients of chip 0x2d on bus 0 to i2c addresses + 0x4a and 0x4b. This parameter is useful for certain Tyan boards. + +Description +----------- + +This driver implements support for the Winbond W83781D, W83782D, W83783S, +W83627HF chips, and the Asus AS99127F chips. We will refer to them +collectively as W8378* chips. + +There is quite some difference between these chips, but they are similar +enough that it was sensible to put them together in one driver. +The W83627HF chip is assumed to be identical to the ISA W83782D. +The Asus chips are similar to an I2C-only W83782D. + +Chip #vin #fanin #pwm #temp wchipid vendid i2c ISA +as99127f 7 3 0 3 0x31 0x12c3 yes no +as99127f rev.2 (type_name = as99127f) 0x31 0x5ca3 yes no +w83781d 7 3 0 3 0x10-1 0x5ca3 yes yes +w83627hf 9 3 2 3 0x21 0x5ca3 yes yes(LPC) +w83782d 9 3 2-4 3 0x30 0x5ca3 yes yes +w83783s 5-6 3 2 1-2 0x40 0x5ca3 yes no + +Detection of these chips can sometimes be foiled because they can be in +an internal state that allows no clean access. If you know the address +of the chip, use a 'force' parameter; this will put them into a more +well-behaved state first. + +The W8378* implements temperature sensors (three on the W83781D and W83782D, +two on the W83783S), three fan rotation speed sensors, voltage sensors +(seven on the W83781D, nine on the W83782D and six on the W83783S), VID +lines, alarms with beep warnings, and some miscellaneous stuff. + +Temperatures are measured in degrees Celsius. There is always one main +temperature sensor, and one (W83783S) or two (W83781D and W83782D) other +sensors. An alarm is triggered for the main sensor once when the +Overtemperature Shutdown limit is crossed; it is triggered again as soon as +it drops below the Hysteresis value. A more useful behavior +can be found by setting the Hysteresis value to +127 degrees Celsius; in +this case, alarms are issued during all the time when the actual temperature +is above the Overtemperature Shutdown value. The driver sets the +hysteresis value for temp1 to 127 at initialization. + +For the other temperature sensor(s), an alarm is triggered when the +temperature gets higher then the Overtemperature Shutdown value; it stays +on until the temperature falls below the Hysteresis value. But on the +W83781D, there is only one alarm that functions for both other sensors! +Temperatures are guaranteed within a range of -55 to +125 degrees. The +main temperature sensors has a resolution of 1 degree; the other sensor(s) +of 0.5 degree. + +Fan rotation speeds are reported in RPM (rotations per minute). An alarm is +triggered if the rotation speed has dropped below a programmable limit. Fan +readings can be divided by a programmable divider (1, 2, 4 or 8 for the +W83781D; 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 or 128 for the others) to give +the readings more range or accuracy. Not all RPM values can accurately +be represented, so some rounding is done. With a divider of 2, the lowest +representable value is around 2600 RPM. + +Voltage sensors (also known as IN sensors) report their values in volts. +An alarm is triggered if the voltage has crossed a programmable minimum +or maximum limit. Note that minimum in this case always means 'closest to +zero'; this is important for negative voltage measurements. All voltage +inputs can measure voltages between 0 and 4.08 volts, with a resolution +of 0.016 volt. + +The VID lines encode the core voltage value: the voltage level your processor +should work with. This is hardcoded by the mainboard and/or processor itself. +It is a value in volts. When it is unconnected, you will often find the +value 3.50 V here. + +The W83782D and W83783S temperature conversion machine understands about +several kinds of temperature probes. You can program the so-called +beta value in the sensor files. '1' is the PII/Celeron diode, '2' is the +TN3904 transistor, and 3435 the default thermistor value. Other values +are (not yet) supported. + +In addition to the alarms described above, there is a CHAS alarm on the +chips which triggers if your computer case is open. + +When an alarm goes off, you can be warned by a beeping signal through +your computer speaker. It is possible to enable all beeping globally, +or only the beeping for some alarms. + +If an alarm triggers, it will remain triggered until the hardware register +is read at least once. This means that the cause for the alarm may +already have disappeared! Note that in the current implementation, all +hardware registers are read whenever any data is read (unless it is less +than 1.5 seconds since the last update). This means that you can easily +miss once-only alarms. + +The chips only update values each 1.5 seconds; reading them more often +will do no harm, but will return 'old' values. + +AS99127F PROBLEMS +----------------- +The as99127f support was developed without the benefit of a datasheet. +In most cases it is treated as a w83781d (although revision 2 of the +AS99127F looks more like a w83782d). +This support will be BETA until a datasheet is released. +One user has reported problems with fans stopping +occasionally. + +Note that the individual beep bits are inverted from the other chips. +The driver now takes care of this so that user-space applications +don't have to know about it. + +Known problems: + - Problems with diode/thermistor settings (supported?) + - One user reports fans stopping under high server load. + - Revision 2 seems to have 2 PWM registers but we don't know + how to handle them. More details below. + +These will not be fixed unless we get a datasheet. +If you have problems, please lobby Asus to release a datasheet. +Unfortunately several others have without success. +Please do not send mail to us asking for better as99127f support. +We have done the best we can without a datasheet. +Please do not send mail to the author or the sensors group asking for +a datasheet or ideas on how to convince Asus. We can't help. + + +NOTES: +----- + 783s has no in1 so that in[2-6] are compatible with the 781d/782d. + + 783s pin is programmable for -5V or temp1; defaults to -5V, + no control in driver so temp1 doesn't work. + + 782d and 783s datasheets differ on which is pwm1 and which is pwm2. + We chose to follow 782d. + + 782d and 783s pin is programmable for fan3 input or pwm2 output; + defaults to fan3 input. + If pwm2 is enabled (with echo 255 1 > pwm2), then + fan3 will report 0. + + 782d has pwm1-2 for ISA, pwm1-4 for i2c. (pwm3-4 share pins with + the ISA pins) + +Data sheet updates: +------------------ + - PWM clock registers: + + 000: master / 512 + 001: master / 1024 + 010: master / 2048 + 011: master / 4096 + 100: master / 8192 + + +Answers from Winbond tech support +--------------------------------- +> +> 1) In the W83781D data sheet section 7.2 last paragraph, it talks about +> reprogramming the R-T table if the Beta of the thermistor is not +> 3435K. The R-T table is described briefly in section 8.20. +> What formulas do I use to program a new R-T table for a given Beta? +> + We are sorry that the calculation for R-T table value is +confidential. If you have another Beta value of thermistor, we can help +to calculate the R-T table for you. But you should give us real R-T +Table which can be gotten by thermistor vendor. Therefore we will calculate +them and obtain 32-byte data, and you can fill the 32-byte data to the +register in Bank0.CR51 of W83781D. + + +> 2) In the W83782D data sheet, it mentions that pins 38, 39, and 40 are +> programmable to be either thermistor or Pentium II diode inputs. +> How do I program them for diode inputs? I can't find any register +> to program these to be diode inputs. + --> You may program Bank0 CR[5Dh] and CR[59h] registers. + + CR[5Dh] bit 1(VTIN1) bit 2(VTIN2) bit 3(VTIN3) + + thermistor 0 0 0 + diode 1 1 1 + + +(error) CR[59h] bit 4(VTIN1) bit 2(VTIN2) bit 3(VTIN3) +(right) CR[59h] bit 4(VTIN1) bit 5(VTIN2) bit 6(VTIN3) + + PII thermal diode 1 1 1 + 2N3904 diode 0 0 0 + + +Asus Clones +----------- + +We have no datasheets for the Asus clones (AS99127F and ASB100 Bach). +Here are some very useful information that were given to us by Alex Van +Kaam about how to detect these chips, and how to read their values. He +also gives advice for another Asus chipset, the Mozart-2 (which we +don't support yet). Thanks Alex! +I reworded some parts and added personal comments. + +# Detection: + +AS99127F rev.1, AS99127F rev.2 and ASB100: +- I2C address range: 0x29 - 0x2F +- If register 0x58 holds 0x31 then we have an Asus (either ASB100 or + AS99127F) +- Which one depends on register 0x4F (manufacturer ID): + 0x06 or 0x94: ASB100 + 0x12 or 0xC3: AS99127F rev.1 + 0x5C or 0xA3: AS99127F rev.2 + Note that 0x5CA3 is Winbond's ID (WEC), which let us think Asus get their + AS99127F rev.2 direct from Winbond. The other codes mean ATT and DVC, + respectively. ATT could stand for Asustek something (although it would be + very badly chosen IMHO), I don't know what DVC could stand for. Maybe + these codes simply aren't meant to be decoded that way. + +Mozart-2: +- I2C address: 0x77 +- If register 0x58 holds 0x56 or 0x10 then we have a Mozart-2 +- Of the Mozart there are 3 types: + 0x58=0x56, 0x4E=0x94, 0x4F=0x36: Asus ASM58 Mozart-2 + 0x58=0x56, 0x4E=0x94, 0x4F=0x06: Asus AS2K129R Mozart-2 + 0x58=0x10, 0x4E=0x5C, 0x4F=0xA3: Asus ??? Mozart-2 + You can handle all 3 the exact same way :) + +# Temperature sensors: + +ASB100: +- sensor 1: register 0x27 +- sensor 2 & 3 are the 2 LM75's on the SMBus +- sensor 4: register 0x17 +Remark: I noticed that on Intel boards sensor 2 is used for the CPU + and 4 is ignored/stuck, on AMD boards sensor 4 is the CPU and sensor 2 is + either ignored or a socket temperature. + +AS99127F (rev.1 and 2 alike): +- sensor 1: register 0x27 +- sensor 2 & 3 are the 2 LM75's on the SMBus +Remark: Register 0x5b is suspected to be temperature type selector. Bit 1 + would control temp1, bit 3 temp2 and bit 5 temp3. + +Mozart-2: +- sensor 1: register 0x27 +- sensor 2: register 0x13 + +# Fan sensors: + +ASB100, AS99127F (rev.1 and 2 alike): +- 3 fans, identical to the W83781D + +Mozart-2: +- 2 fans only, 1350000/RPM/div +- fan 1: register 0x28, divisor on register 0xA1 (bits 4-5) +- fan 2: register 0x29, divisor on register 0xA1 (bits 6-7) + +# Voltages: + +This is where there is a difference between AS99127F rev.1 and 2. +Remark: The difference is similar to the difference between + W83781D and W83782D. + +ASB100: +in0=r(0x20)*0.016 +in1=r(0x21)*0.016 +in2=r(0x22)*0.016 +in3=r(0x23)*0.016*1.68 +in4=r(0x24)*0.016*3.8 +in5=r(0x25)*(-0.016)*3.97 +in6=r(0x26)*(-0.016)*1.666 + +AS99127F rev.1: +in0=r(0x20)*0.016 +in1=r(0x21)*0.016 +in2=r(0x22)*0.016 +in3=r(0x23)*0.016*1.68 +in4=r(0x24)*0.016*3.8 +in5=r(0x25)*(-0.016)*3.97 +in6=r(0x26)*(-0.016)*1.503 + +AS99127F rev.2: +in0=r(0x20)*0.016 +in1=r(0x21)*0.016 +in2=r(0x22)*0.016 +in3=r(0x23)*0.016*1.68 +in4=r(0x24)*0.016*3.8 +in5=(r(0x25)*0.016-3.6)*5.14+3.6 +in6=(r(0x26)*0.016-3.6)*3.14+3.6 + +Mozart-2: +in0=r(0x20)*0.016 +in1=255 +in2=r(0x22)*0.016 +in3=r(0x23)*0.016*1.68 +in4=r(0x24)*0.016*4 +in5=255 +in6=255 + + +# PWM + +Additional info about PWM on the AS99127F (may apply to other Asus +chips as well) by Jean Delvare as of 2004-04-09: + +AS99127F revision 2 seems to have two PWM registers at 0x59 and 0x5A, +and a temperature sensor type selector at 0x5B (which basically means +that they swapped registers 0x59 and 0x5B when you compare with Winbond +chips). +Revision 1 of the chip also has the temperature sensor type selector at +0x5B, but PWM registers have no effect. + +We don't know exactly how the temperature sensor type selection works. +Looks like bits 1-0 are for temp1, bits 3-2 for temp2 and bits 5-4 for +temp3, although it is possible that only the most significant bit matters +each time. So far, values other than 0 always broke the readings. + +PWM registers seem to be split in two parts: bit 7 is a mode selector, +while the other bits seem to define a value or threshold. + +When bit 7 is clear, bits 6-0 seem to hold a threshold value. If the value +is below a given limit, the fan runs at low speed. If the value is above +the limit, the fan runs at full speed. We have no clue as to what the limit +represents. Note that there seem to be some inertia in this mode, speed +changes may need some time to trigger. Also, an hysteresis mechanism is +suspected since walking through all the values increasingly and then +decreasingly led to slightly different limits. + +When bit 7 is set, bits 3-0 seem to hold a threshold value, while bits 6-4 +would not be significant. If the value is below a given limit, the fan runs +at full speed, while if it is above the limit it runs at low speed (so this +is the contrary of the other mode, in a way). Here again, we don't know +what the limit is supposed to represent. + +One remarkable thing is that the fans would only have two or three +different speeds (transitional states left apart), not a whole range as +you usually get with PWM. + +As a conclusion, you can write 0x00 or 0x8F to the PWM registers to make +fans run at low speed, and 0x7F or 0x80 to make them run at full speed. + +Please contact us if you can figure out how it is supposed to work. As +long as we don't know more, the w83781d driver doesn't handle PWM on +AS99127F chips at all. + +Additional info about PWM on the AS99127F rev.1 by Hector Martin: + +I've been fiddling around with the (in)famous 0x59 register and +found out the following values do work as a form of coarse pwm: + +0x80 - seems to turn fans off after some time(1-2 minutes)... might be +some form of auto-fan-control based on temp? hmm (Qfan? this mobo is an +old ASUS, it isn't marketed as Qfan. Maybe some beta pre-attemp at Qfan +that was dropped at the BIOS) +0x81 - off +0x82 - slightly "on-ner" than off, but my fans do not get to move. I can +hear the high-pitched PWM sound that motors give off at too-low-pwm. +0x83 - now they do move. Estimate about 70% speed or so. +0x84-0x8f - full on + +Changing the high nibble doesn't seem to do much except the high bit +(0x80) must be set for PWM to work, else the current pwm doesn't seem to +change. + +My mobo is an ASUS A7V266-E. This behavior is similar to what I got +with speedfan under Windows, where 0-15% would be off, 15-2x% (can't +remember the exact value) would be 70% and higher would be full on. diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/chips/w83l785ts b/Documentation/i2c/chips/w83l785ts new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1841ced --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/i2c/chips/w83l785ts @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ +Kernel driver w83l785ts +======================= + +Supported chips: + * Winbond W83L785TS-S + Prefix: 'w83l785ts' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2e + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Winbond USA website + http://www.winbond-usa.com/products/winbond_products/pdfs/PCIC/W83L785TS-S.pdf + +Authors: + Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org> + +Description +----------- + +The W83L785TS-S is a digital temperature sensor. It senses the +temperature of a single external diode. The high limit is +theoretically defined as 85 or 100 degrees C through a combination +of external resistors, so the user cannot change it. Values seen so +far suggest that the two possible limits are actually 95 and 110 +degrees C. The datasheet is rather poor and obviously inaccurate +on several points including this one. + +All temperature values are given in degrees Celsius. Resolution +is 1.0 degree. See the datasheet for details. + +The w83l785ts driver will not update its values more frequently than +every other second; reading them more often will do no harm, but will +return 'old' values. + +Known Issues +------------ + +On some systems (Asus), the BIOS is known to interfere with the driver +and cause read errors. The driver will retry a given number of times +(5 by default) and then give up, returning the old value (or 0 if +there is no old value). It seems to work well enough so that you should +not notice anything. Thanks to James Bolt for helping test this feature. diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/porting-clients b/Documentation/i2c/porting-clients index 5640491..a7adbdd 100644 --- a/Documentation/i2c/porting-clients +++ b/Documentation/i2c/porting-clients @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ Technical changes: Documentation/i2c/sysfs-interface for the individual files. Also convert the units these files read and write to the specified ones. If you need to add a new type of file, please discuss it on the - sensors mailing list <sensors@stimpy.netroedge.com> by providing a + sensors mailing list <lm-sensors@lm-sensors.org> by providing a patch to the Documentation/i2c/sysfs-interface file. * [Attach] For I2C drivers, the attach function should make sure diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/userspace-tools b/Documentation/i2c/userspace-tools new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2622aac --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/i2c/userspace-tools @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ +Introduction +------------ + +Most mainboards have sensor chips to monitor system health (like temperatures, +voltages, fans speed). They are often connected through an I2C bus, but some +are also connected directly through the ISA bus. + +The kernel drivers make the data from the sensor chips available in the /sys +virtual filesystem. Userspace tools are then used to display or set or the +data in a more friendly manner. + +Lm-sensors +---------- + +Core set of utilites that will allow you to obtain health information, +setup monitoring limits etc. You can get them on their homepage +http://www.lm-sensors.nu/ or as a package from your Linux distribution. + +If from website: +Get lmsensors from project web site. Please note, you need only userspace +part, so compile with "make user_install" target. + +General hints to get things working: + +0) get lm-sensors userspace utils +1) compile all drivers in I2C section as modules in your kernel +2) run sensors-detect script, it will tell you what modules you need to load. +3) load them and run "sensors" command, you should see some results. +4) fix sensors.conf, labels, limits, fan divisors +5) if any more problems consult FAQ, or documentation + +Other utilites +-------------- + +If you want some graphical indicators of system health look for applications +like: gkrellm, ksensors, xsensors, wmtemp, wmsensors, wmgtemp, ksysguardd, +hardware-monitor + +If you are server administrator you can try snmpd or mrtgutils. diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/writing-clients b/Documentation/i2c/writing-clients index ad27511..f482dae 100644 --- a/Documentation/i2c/writing-clients +++ b/Documentation/i2c/writing-clients @@ -171,45 +171,31 @@ The following lists are used internally: normal_i2c: filled in by the module writer. A list of I2C addresses which should normally be examined. - normal_i2c_range: filled in by the module writer. - A list of pairs of I2C addresses, each pair being an inclusive range of - addresses which should normally be examined. probe: insmod parameter. A list of pairs. The first value is a bus number (-1 for any I2C bus), the second is the address. These addresses are also probed, as if they were in the 'normal' list. - probe_range: insmod parameter. - A list of triples. The first value is a bus number (-1 for any I2C bus), - the second and third are addresses. These form an inclusive range of - addresses that are also probed, as if they were in the 'normal' list. ignore: insmod parameter. A list of pairs. The first value is a bus number (-1 for any I2C bus), the second is the I2C address. These addresses are never probed. This parameter overrules 'normal' and 'probe', but not the 'force' lists. - ignore_range: insmod parameter. - A list of triples. The first value is a bus number (-1 for any I2C bus), - the second and third are addresses. These form an inclusive range of - I2C addresses that are never probed. - This parameter overrules 'normal' and 'probe', but not the 'force' lists. force: insmod parameter. A list of pairs. The first value is a bus number (-1 for any I2C bus), the second is the I2C address. A device is blindly assumed to be on the given address, no probing is done. -Fortunately, as a module writer, you just have to define the `normal' -and/or `normal_range' parameters. The complete declaration could look -like this: +Fortunately, as a module writer, you just have to define the `normal_i2c' +parameter. The complete declaration could look like this: - /* Scan 0x20 to 0x2f, 0x37, and 0x40 to 0x4f */ - static unsigned short normal_i2c[] = { 0x37,I2C_CLIENT_END }; - static unsigned short normal_i2c_range[] = { 0x20, 0x2f, 0x40, 0x4f, - I2C_CLIENT_END }; + /* Scan 0x37, and 0x48 to 0x4f */ + static unsigned short normal_i2c[] = { 0x37, 0x48, 0x49, 0x4a, 0x4b, 0x4c, + 0x4d, 0x4e, 0x4f, I2C_CLIENT_END }; /* Magic definition of all other variables and things */ I2C_CLIENT_INSMOD; -Note that you *have* to call the two defined variables `normal_i2c' and -`normal_i2c_range', without any prefix! +Note that you *have* to call the defined variable `normal_i2c', +without any prefix! Probing classes (sensors) @@ -223,39 +209,17 @@ The following lists are used internally. They are all lists of integers. normal_i2c: filled in by the module writer. Terminated by SENSORS_I2C_END. A list of I2C addresses which should normally be examined. - normal_i2c_range: filled in by the module writer. Terminated by - SENSORS_I2C_END - A list of pairs of I2C addresses, each pair being an inclusive range of - addresses which should normally be examined. normal_isa: filled in by the module writer. Terminated by SENSORS_ISA_END. A list of ISA addresses which should normally be examined. - normal_isa_range: filled in by the module writer. Terminated by - SENSORS_ISA_END - A list of triples. The first two elements are ISA addresses, being an - range of addresses which should normally be examined. The third is the - modulo parameter: only addresses which are 0 module this value relative - to the first address of the range are actually considered. probe: insmod parameter. Initialize this list with SENSORS_I2C_END values. A list of pairs. The first value is a bus number (SENSORS_ISA_BUS for the ISA bus, -1 for any I2C bus), the second is the address. These addresses are also probed, as if they were in the 'normal' list. - probe_range: insmod parameter. Initialize this list with SENSORS_I2C_END - values. - A list of triples. The first value is a bus number (SENSORS_ISA_BUS for - the ISA bus, -1 for any I2C bus), the second and third are addresses. - These form an inclusive range of addresses that are also probed, as - if they were in the 'normal' list. ignore: insmod parameter. Initialize this list with SENSORS_I2C_END values. A list of pairs. The first value is a bus number (SENSORS_ISA_BUS for the ISA bus, -1 for any I2C bus), the second is the I2C address. These addresses are never probed. This parameter overrules 'normal' and 'probe', but not the 'force' lists. - ignore_range: insmod parameter. Initialize this list with SENSORS_I2C_END - values. - A list of triples. The first value is a bus number (SENSORS_ISA_BUS for - the ISA bus, -1 for any I2C bus), the second and third are addresses. - These form an inclusive range of I2C addresses that are never probed. - This parameter overrules 'normal' and 'probe', but not the 'force' lists. Also used is a list of pointers to sensors_force_data structures: force_data: insmod parameters. A list, ending with an element of which @@ -269,16 +233,14 @@ Also used is a list of pointers to sensors_force_data structures: So we have a generic insmod variabled `force', and chip-specific variables `force_CHIPNAME'. -Fortunately, as a module writer, you just have to define the `normal' -and/or `normal_range' parameters, and define what chip names are used. +Fortunately, as a module writer, you just have to define the `normal_i2c' +and `normal_isa' parameters, and define what chip names are used. The complete declaration could look like this: - /* Scan i2c addresses 0x20 to 0x2f, 0x37, and 0x40 to 0x4f - static unsigned short normal_i2c[] = {0x37,SENSORS_I2C_END}; - static unsigned short normal_i2c_range[] = {0x20,0x2f,0x40,0x4f, - SENSORS_I2C_END}; + /* Scan i2c addresses 0x37, and 0x48 to 0x4f */ + static unsigned short normal_i2c[] = { 0x37, 0x48, 0x49, 0x4a, 0x4b, 0x4c, + 0x4d, 0x4e, 0x4f, I2C_CLIENT_END }; /* Scan ISA address 0x290 */ static unsigned int normal_isa[] = {0x0290,SENSORS_ISA_END}; - static unsigned int normal_isa_range[] = {SENSORS_ISA_END}; /* Define chips foo and bar, as well as all module parameters and things */ SENSORS_INSMOD_2(foo,bar); diff --git a/Documentation/kdump/gdbmacros.txt b/Documentation/kdump/gdbmacros.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..bc1b9eb --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/kdump/gdbmacros.txt @@ -0,0 +1,179 @@ +# +# This file contains a few gdb macros (user defined commands) to extract +# useful information from kernel crashdump (kdump) like stack traces of +# all the processes or a particular process and trapinfo. +# +# These macros can be used by copying this file in .gdbinit (put in home +# directory or current directory) or by invoking gdb command with +# --command=<command-file-name> option +# +# Credits: +# Alexander Nyberg <alexn@telia.com> +# V Srivatsa <vatsa@in.ibm.com> +# Maneesh Soni <maneesh@in.ibm.com> +# + +define bttnobp + set $tasks_off=((size_t)&((struct task_struct *)0)->tasks) + set $pid_off=((size_t)&((struct task_struct *)0)->pids[1].pid_list.next) + set $init_t=&init_task + set $next_t=(((char *)($init_t->tasks).next) - $tasks_off) + while ($next_t != $init_t) + set $next_t=(struct task_struct *)$next_t + printf "\npid %d; comm %s:\n", $next_t.pid, $next_t.comm + printf "===================\n" + set var $stackp = $next_t.thread.esp + set var $stack_top = ($stackp & ~4095) + 4096 + + while ($stackp < $stack_top) + if (*($stackp) > _stext && *($stackp) < _sinittext) + info symbol *($stackp) + end + set $stackp += 4 + end + set $next_th=(((char *)$next_t->pids[1].pid_list.next) - $pid_off) + while ($next_th != $next_t) + set $next_th=(struct task_struct *)$next_th + printf "\npid %d; comm %s:\n", $next_t.pid, $next_t.comm + printf "===================\n" + set var $stackp = $next_t.thread.esp + set var $stack_top = ($stackp & ~4095) + 4096 + + while ($stackp < $stack_top) + if (*($stackp) > _stext && *($stackp) < _sinittext) + info symbol *($stackp) + end + set $stackp += 4 + end + set $next_th=(((char *)$next_th->pids[1].pid_list.next) - $pid_off) + end + set $next_t=(char *)($next_t->tasks.next) - $tasks_off + end +end +document bttnobp + dump all thread stack traces on a kernel compiled with !CONFIG_FRAME_POINTER +end + +define btt + set $tasks_off=((size_t)&((struct task_struct *)0)->tasks) + set $pid_off=((size_t)&((struct task_struct *)0)->pids[1].pid_list.next) + set $init_t=&init_task + set $next_t=(((char *)($init_t->tasks).next) - $tasks_off) + while ($next_t != $init_t) + set $next_t=(struct task_struct *)$next_t + printf "\npid %d; comm %s:\n", $next_t.pid, $next_t.comm + printf "===================\n" + set var $stackp = $next_t.thread.esp + set var $stack_top = ($stackp & ~4095) + 4096 + set var $stack_bot = ($stackp & ~4095) + + set $stackp = *($stackp) + while (($stackp < $stack_top) && ($stackp > $stack_bot)) + set var $addr = *($stackp + 4) + info symbol $addr + set $stackp = *($stackp) + end + + set $next_th=(((char *)$next_t->pids[1].pid_list.next) - $pid_off) + while ($next_th != $next_t) + set $next_th=(struct task_struct *)$next_th + printf "\npid %d; comm %s:\n", $next_t.pid, $next_t.comm + printf "===================\n" + set var $stackp = $next_t.thread.esp + set var $stack_top = ($stackp & ~4095) + 4096 + set var $stack_bot = ($stackp & ~4095) + + set $stackp = *($stackp) + while (($stackp < $stack_top) && ($stackp > $stack_bot)) + set var $addr = *($stackp + 4) + info symbol $addr + set $stackp = *($stackp) + end + set $next_th=(((char *)$next_th->pids[1].pid_list.next) - $pid_off) + end + set $next_t=(char *)($next_t->tasks.next) - $tasks_off + end +end +document btt + dump all thread stack traces on a kernel compiled with CONFIG_FRAME_POINTER +end + +define btpid + set var $pid = $arg0 + set $tasks_off=((size_t)&((struct task_struct *)0)->tasks) + set $pid_off=((size_t)&((struct task_struct *)0)->pids[1].pid_list.next) + set $init_t=&init_task + set $next_t=(((char *)($init_t->tasks).next) - $tasks_off) + set var $pid_task = 0 + + while ($next_t != $init_t) + set $next_t=(struct task_struct *)$next_t + + if ($next_t.pid == $pid) + set $pid_task = $next_t + end + + set $next_th=(((char *)$next_t->pids[1].pid_list.next) - $pid_off) + while ($next_th != $next_t) + set $next_th=(struct task_struct *)$next_th + if ($next_th.pid == $pid) + set $pid_task = $next_th + end + set $next_th=(((char *)$next_th->pids[1].pid_list.next) - $pid_off) + end + set $next_t=(char *)($next_t->tasks.next) - $tasks_off + end + + printf "\npid %d; comm %s:\n", $pid_task.pid, $pid_task.comm + printf "===================\n" + set var $stackp = $pid_task.thread.esp + set var $stack_top = ($stackp & ~4095) + 4096 + set var $stack_bot = ($stackp & ~4095) + + set $stackp = *($stackp) + while (($stackp < $stack_top) && ($stackp > $stack_bot)) + set var $addr = *($stackp + 4) + info symbol $addr + set $stackp = *($stackp) + end +end +document btpid + backtrace of pid +end + + +define trapinfo + set var $pid = $arg0 + set $tasks_off=((size_t)&((struct task_struct *)0)->tasks) + set $pid_off=((size_t)&((struct task_struct *)0)->pids[1].pid_list.next) + set $init_t=&init_task + set $next_t=(((char *)($init_t->tasks).next) - $tasks_off) + set var $pid_task = 0 + + while ($next_t != $init_t) + set $next_t=(struct task_struct *)$next_t + + if ($next_t.pid == $pid) + set $pid_task = $next_t + end + + set $next_th=(((char *)$next_t->pids[1].pid_list.next) - $pid_off) + while ($next_th != $next_t) + set $next_th=(struct task_struct *)$next_th + if ($next_th.pid == $pid) + set $pid_task = $next_th + end + set $next_th=(((char *)$next_th->pids[1].pid_list.next) - $pid_off) + end + set $next_t=(char *)($next_t->tasks.next) - $tasks_off + end + + printf "Trapno %ld, cr2 0x%lx, error_code %ld\n", $pid_task.thread.trap_no, \ + $pid_task.thread.cr2, $pid_task.thread.error_code + +end +document trapinfo + Run info threads and lookup pid of thread #1 + 'trapinfo <pid>' will tell you by which trap & possibly + addresthe kernel paniced. +end diff --git a/Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt b/Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7ff213f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt @@ -0,0 +1,141 @@ +Documentation for kdump - the kexec-based crash dumping solution +================================================================ + +DESIGN +====== + +Kdump uses kexec to reboot to a second kernel whenever a dump needs to be taken. +This second kernel is booted with very little memory. The first kernel reserves +the section of memory that the second kernel uses. This ensures that on-going +DMA from the first kernel does not corrupt the second kernel. + +All the necessary information about Core image is encoded in ELF format and +stored in reserved area of memory before crash. Physical address of start of +ELF header is passed to new kernel through command line parameter elfcorehdr=. + +On i386, the first 640 KB of physical memory is needed to boot, irrespective +of where the kernel loads. Hence, this region is backed up by kexec just before +rebooting into the new kernel. + +In the second kernel, "old memory" can be accessed in two ways. + +- The first one is through a /dev/oldmem device interface. A capture utility + can read the device file and write out the memory in raw format. This is raw + dump of memory and analysis/capture tool should be intelligent enough to + determine where to look for the right information. ELF headers (elfcorehdr=) + can become handy here. + +- The second interface is through /proc/vmcore. This exports the dump as an ELF + format file which can be written out using any file copy command + (cp, scp, etc). Further, gdb can be used to perform limited debugging on + the dump file. This method ensures methods ensure that there is correct + ordering of the dump pages (corresponding to the first 640 KB that has been + relocated). + +SETUP +===== + +1) Download http://www.xmission.com/~ebiederm/files/kexec/kexec-tools-1.101.tar.gz + and apply http://lse.sourceforge.net/kdump/patches/kexec-tools-1.101-kdump.patch + and after that build the source. + +2) Download and build the appropriate (latest) kexec/kdump (-mm) kernel + patchset and apply it to the vanilla kernel tree. + + Two kernels need to be built in order to get this feature working. + + A) First kernel: + a) Enable "kexec system call" feature (in Processor type and features). + CONFIG_KEXEC=y + b) This kernel's physical load address should be the default value of + 0x100000 (0x100000, 1 MB) (in Processor type and features). + CONFIG_PHYSICAL_START=0x100000 + c) Enable "sysfs file system support" (in Pseudo filesystems). + CONFIG_SYSFS=y + d) Boot into first kernel with the command line parameter "crashkernel=Y@X". + Use appropriate values for X and Y. Y denotes how much memory to reserve + for the second kernel, and X denotes at what physical address the reserved + memory section starts. For example: "crashkernel=64M@16M". + + B) Second kernel: + a) Enable "kernel crash dumps" feature (in Processor type and features). + CONFIG_CRASH_DUMP=y + b) Specify a suitable value for "Physical address where the kernel is + loaded" (in Processor type and features). Typically this value + should be same as X (See option d) above, e.g., 16 MB or 0x1000000. + CONFIG_PHYSICAL_START=0x1000000 + c) Enable "/proc/vmcore support" (Optional, in Pseudo filesystems). + CONFIG_PROC_VMCORE=y + d) Disable SMP support and build a UP kernel (Until it is fixed). + CONFIG_SMP=n + e) Enable "Local APIC support on uniprocessors". + CONFIG_X86_UP_APIC=y + f) Enable "IO-APIC support on uniprocessors" + CONFIG_X86_UP_IOAPIC=y + + Note: i) Options a) and b) depend upon "Configure standard kernel features + (for small systems)" (under General setup). + ii) Option a) also depends on CONFIG_HIGHMEM (under Processor + type and features). + iii) Both option a) and b) are under "Processor type and features". + +3) Boot into the first kernel. You are now ready to try out kexec-based crash + dumps. + +4) Load the second kernel to be booted using: + + kexec -p <second-kernel> --crash-dump --args-linux --append="root=<root-dev> + init 1 irqpoll" + + Note: i) <second-kernel> has to be a vmlinux image. bzImage will not work, + as of now. + ii) By default ELF headers are stored in ELF32 format (for i386). This + is sufficient to represent the physical memory up to 4GB. To store + headers in ELF64 format, specifiy "--elf64-core-headers" on the + kexec command line additionally. + iii) Specify "irqpoll" as command line parameter. This reduces driver + initialization failures in second kernel due to shared interrupts. + +5) System reboots into the second kernel when a panic occurs. A module can be + written to force the panic or "ALT-SysRq-c" can be used initiate a crash + dump for testing purposes. + +6) Write out the dump file using + + cp /proc/vmcore <dump-file> + + Dump memory can also be accessed as a /dev/oldmem device for a linear/raw + view. To create the device, type: + + mknod /dev/oldmem c 1 12 + + Use "dd" with suitable options for count, bs and skip to access specific + portions of the dump. + + Entire memory: dd if=/dev/oldmem of=oldmem.001 + +ANALYSIS +======== + +Limited analysis can be done using gdb on the dump file copied out of +/proc/vmcore. Use vmlinux built with -g and run + + gdb vmlinux <dump-file> + +Stack trace for the task on processor 0, register display, memory display +work fine. + +Note: gdb cannot analyse core files generated in ELF64 format for i386. + +TODO +==== + +1) Provide a kernel pages filtering mechanism so that core file size is not + insane on systems having huge memory banks. +2) Modify "crash" tool to make it recognize this dump. + +CONTACT +======= + +Vivek Goyal (vgoyal@in.ibm.com) +Maneesh Soni (maneesh@in.ibm.com) diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 4924d387..f44bb55 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -358,6 +358,10 @@ running once the system is up. cpia_pp= [HW,PPT] Format: { parport<nr> | auto | none } + crashkernel=nn[KMG]@ss[KMG] + [KNL] Reserve a chunk of physical memory to + hold a kernel to switch to with kexec on panic. + cs4232= [HW,OSS] Format: <io>,<irq>,<dma>,<dma2>,<mpuio>,<mpuirq> @@ -447,6 +451,10 @@ running once the system is up. Format: {"as"|"cfq"|"deadline"|"noop"} See Documentation/block/as-iosched.txt and Documentation/block/deadline-iosched.txt for details. + elfcorehdr= [IA-32] + Specifies physical address of start of kernel core image + elf header. + See Documentation/kdump.txt for details. enforcing [SELINUX] Set initial enforcing status. Format: {"0" | "1"} @@ -548,6 +556,9 @@ running once the system is up. i810= [HW,DRM] + i8k.ignore_dmi [HW] Continue probing hardware even if DMI data + indicates that the driver is running on unsupported + hardware. i8k.force [HW] Activate i8k driver even if SMM BIOS signature does not match list of supported models. i8k.power_status diff --git a/Documentation/keys.txt b/Documentation/keys.txt index 36d80ae..0321ded 100644 --- a/Documentation/keys.txt +++ b/Documentation/keys.txt @@ -22,6 +22,7 @@ This document has the following sections: - New procfs files - Userspace system call interface - Kernel services + - Notes on accessing payload contents - Defining a key type - Request-key callback service - Key access filesystem @@ -45,27 +46,26 @@ Each key has a number of attributes: - State. - (*) Each key is issued a serial number of type key_serial_t that is unique - for the lifetime of that key. All serial numbers are positive non-zero - 32-bit integers. + (*) Each key is issued a serial number of type key_serial_t that is unique for + the lifetime of that key. All serial numbers are positive non-zero 32-bit + integers. Userspace programs can use a key's serial numbers as a way to gain access to it, subject to permission checking. (*) Each key is of a defined "type". Types must be registered inside the - kernel by a kernel service (such as a filesystem) before keys of that - type can be added or used. Userspace programs cannot define new types - directly. + kernel by a kernel service (such as a filesystem) before keys of that type + can be added or used. Userspace programs cannot define new types directly. - Key types are represented in the kernel by struct key_type. This defines - a number of operations that can be performed on a key of that type. + Key types are represented in the kernel by struct key_type. This defines a + number of operations that can be performed on a key of that type. Should a type be removed from the system, all the keys of that type will be invalidated. (*) Each key has a description. This should be a printable string. The key - type provides an operation to perform a match between the description on - a key and a criterion string. + type provides an operation to perform a match between the description on a + key and a criterion string. (*) Each key has an owner user ID, a group ID and a permissions mask. These are used to control what a process may do to a key from userspace, and @@ -74,10 +74,10 @@ Each key has a number of attributes: (*) Each key can be set to expire at a specific time by the key type's instantiation function. Keys can also be immortal. - (*) Each key can have a payload. This is a quantity of data that represent - the actual "key". In the case of a keyring, this is a list of keys to - which the keyring links; in the case of a user-defined key, it's an - arbitrary blob of data. + (*) Each key can have a payload. This is a quantity of data that represent the + actual "key". In the case of a keyring, this is a list of keys to which + the keyring links; in the case of a user-defined key, it's an arbitrary + blob of data. Having a payload is not required; and the payload can, in fact, just be a value stored in the struct key itself. @@ -92,8 +92,8 @@ Each key has a number of attributes: (*) Each key can be in one of a number of basic states: - (*) Uninstantiated. The key exists, but does not have any data - attached. Keys being requested from userspace will be in this state. + (*) Uninstantiated. The key exists, but does not have any data attached. + Keys being requested from userspace will be in this state. (*) Instantiated. This is the normal state. The key is fully formed, and has data attached. @@ -140,10 +140,10 @@ The key service provides a number of features besides keys: clone, fork, vfork or execve occurs. A new keyring is created only when required. - The process-specific keyring is replaced with an empty one in the child - on clone, fork, vfork unless CLONE_THREAD is supplied, in which case it - is shared. execve also discards the process's process keyring and creates - a new one. + The process-specific keyring is replaced with an empty one in the child on + clone, fork, vfork unless CLONE_THREAD is supplied, in which case it is + shared. execve also discards the process's process keyring and creates a + new one. The session-specific keyring is persistent across clone, fork, vfork and execve, even when the latter executes a set-UID or set-GID binary. A @@ -177,11 +177,11 @@ The key service provides a number of features besides keys: If a system call that modifies a key or keyring in some way would put the user over quota, the operation is refused and error EDQUOT is returned. - (*) There's a system call interface by which userspace programs can create - and manipulate keys and keyrings. + (*) There's a system call interface by which userspace programs can create and + manipulate keys and keyrings. - (*) There's a kernel interface by which services can register types and - search for keys. + (*) There's a kernel interface by which services can register types and search + for keys. (*) There's a way for the a search done from the kernel to call back to userspace to request a key that can't be found in a process's keyrings. @@ -194,9 +194,9 @@ The key service provides a number of features besides keys: KEY ACCESS PERMISSIONS ====================== -Keys have an owner user ID, a group access ID, and a permissions mask. The -mask has up to eight bits each for user, group and other access. Only five of -each set of eight bits are defined. These permissions granted are: +Keys have an owner user ID, a group access ID, and a permissions mask. The mask +has up to eight bits each for user, group and other access. Only five of each +set of eight bits are defined. These permissions granted are: (*) View @@ -210,8 +210,8 @@ each set of eight bits are defined. These permissions granted are: (*) Write - This permits a key's payload to be instantiated or updated, or it allows - a link to be added to or removed from a keyring. + This permits a key's payload to be instantiated or updated, or it allows a + link to be added to or removed from a keyring. (*) Search @@ -238,8 +238,8 @@ about the status of the key service: (*) /proc/keys This lists all the keys on the system, giving information about their - type, description and permissions. The payload of the key is not - available this way: + type, description and permissions. The payload of the key is not available + this way: SERIAL FLAGS USAGE EXPY PERM UID GID TYPE DESCRIPTION: SUMMARY 00000001 I----- 39 perm 1f0000 0 0 keyring _uid_ses.0: 1/4 @@ -318,21 +318,21 @@ The main syscalls are: If a key of the same type and description as that proposed already exists in the keyring, this will try to update it with the given payload, or it will return error EEXIST if that function is not supported by the key - type. The process must also have permission to write to the key to be - able to update it. The new key will have all user permissions granted and - no group or third party permissions. + type. The process must also have permission to write to the key to be able + to update it. The new key will have all user permissions granted and no + group or third party permissions. - Otherwise, this will attempt to create a new key of the specified type - and description, and to instantiate it with the supplied payload and - attach it to the keyring. In this case, an error will be generated if the - process does not have permission to write to the keyring. + Otherwise, this will attempt to create a new key of the specified type and + description, and to instantiate it with the supplied payload and attach it + to the keyring. In this case, an error will be generated if the process + does not have permission to write to the keyring. The payload is optional, and the pointer can be NULL if not required by the type. The payload is plen in size, and plen can be zero for an empty payload. - A new keyring can be generated by setting type "keyring", the keyring - name as the description (or NULL) and setting the payload to NULL. + A new keyring can be generated by setting type "keyring", the keyring name + as the description (or NULL) and setting the payload to NULL. User defined keys can be created by specifying type "user". It is recommended that a user defined key's description by prefixed with a type @@ -369,9 +369,9 @@ The keyctl syscall functions are: key_serial_t keyctl(KEYCTL_GET_KEYRING_ID, key_serial_t id, int create); - The special key specified by "id" is looked up (with the key being - created if necessary) and the ID of the key or keyring thus found is - returned if it exists. + The special key specified by "id" is looked up (with the key being created + if necessary) and the ID of the key or keyring thus found is returned if + it exists. If the key does not yet exist, the key will be created if "create" is non-zero; and the error ENOKEY will be returned if "create" is zero. @@ -402,8 +402,8 @@ The keyctl syscall functions are: This will try to update the specified key with the given payload, or it will return error EOPNOTSUPP if that function is not supported by the key - type. The process must also have permission to write to the key to be - able to update it. + type. The process must also have permission to write to the key to be able + to update it. The payload is of length plen, and may be absent or empty as for add_key(). @@ -422,8 +422,8 @@ The keyctl syscall functions are: long keyctl(KEYCTL_CHOWN, key_serial_t key, uid_t uid, gid_t gid); - This function permits a key's owner and group ID to be changed. Either - one of uid or gid can be set to -1 to suppress that change. + This function permits a key's owner and group ID to be changed. Either one + of uid or gid can be set to -1 to suppress that change. Only the superuser can change a key's owner to something other than the key's current owner. Similarly, only the superuser can change a key's @@ -484,12 +484,12 @@ The keyctl syscall functions are: long keyctl(KEYCTL_LINK, key_serial_t keyring, key_serial_t key); - This function creates a link from the keyring to the key. The process - must have write permission on the keyring and must have link permission - on the key. + This function creates a link from the keyring to the key. The process must + have write permission on the keyring and must have link permission on the + key. - Should the keyring not be a keyring, error ENOTDIR will result; and if - the keyring is full, error ENFILE will result. + Should the keyring not be a keyring, error ENOTDIR will result; and if the + keyring is full, error ENFILE will result. The link procedure checks the nesting of the keyrings, returning ELOOP if it appears to deep or EDEADLK if the link would introduce a cycle. @@ -503,8 +503,8 @@ The keyctl syscall functions are: specified key, and removes it if found. Subsequent links to that key are ignored. The process must have write permission on the keyring. - If the keyring is not a keyring, error ENOTDIR will result; and if the - key is not present, error ENOENT will be the result. + If the keyring is not a keyring, error ENOTDIR will result; and if the key + is not present, error ENOENT will be the result. (*) Search a keyring tree for a key: @@ -513,9 +513,9 @@ The keyctl syscall functions are: const char *type, const char *description, key_serial_t dest_keyring); - This searches the keyring tree headed by the specified keyring until a - key is found that matches the type and description criteria. Each keyring - is checked for keys before recursion into its children occurs. + This searches the keyring tree headed by the specified keyring until a key + is found that matches the type and description criteria. Each keyring is + checked for keys before recursion into its children occurs. The process must have search permission on the top level keyring, or else error EACCES will result. Only keyrings that the process has search @@ -549,8 +549,8 @@ The keyctl syscall functions are: As much of the data as can be fitted into the buffer will be copied to userspace if the buffer pointer is not NULL. - On a successful return, the function will always return the amount of - data available rather than the amount copied. + On a successful return, the function will always return the amount of data + available rather than the amount copied. (*) Instantiate a partially constructed key. @@ -568,8 +568,8 @@ The keyctl syscall functions are: it, and the key must be uninstantiated. If a keyring is specified (non-zero), the key will also be linked into - that keyring, however all the constraints applying in KEYCTL_LINK apply - in this case too. + that keyring, however all the constraints applying in KEYCTL_LINK apply in + this case too. The payload and plen arguments describe the payload data as for add_key(). @@ -587,8 +587,39 @@ The keyctl syscall functions are: it, and the key must be uninstantiated. If a keyring is specified (non-zero), the key will also be linked into - that keyring, however all the constraints applying in KEYCTL_LINK apply - in this case too. + that keyring, however all the constraints applying in KEYCTL_LINK apply in + this case too. + + + (*) Set the default request-key destination keyring. + + long keyctl(KEYCTL_SET_REQKEY_KEYRING, int reqkey_defl); + + This sets the default keyring to which implicitly requested keys will be + attached for this thread. reqkey_defl should be one of these constants: + + CONSTANT VALUE NEW DEFAULT KEYRING + ====================================== ====== ======================= + KEY_REQKEY_DEFL_NO_CHANGE -1 No change + KEY_REQKEY_DEFL_DEFAULT 0 Default[1] + KEY_REQKEY_DEFL_THREAD_KEYRING 1 Thread keyring + KEY_REQKEY_DEFL_PROCESS_KEYRING 2 Process keyring + KEY_REQKEY_DEFL_SESSION_KEYRING 3 Session keyring + KEY_REQKEY_DEFL_USER_KEYRING 4 User keyring + KEY_REQKEY_DEFL_USER_SESSION_KEYRING 5 User session keyring + KEY_REQKEY_DEFL_GROUP_KEYRING 6 Group keyring + + The old default will be returned if successful and error EINVAL will be + returned if reqkey_defl is not one of the above values. + + The default keyring can be overridden by the keyring indicated to the + request_key() system call. + + Note that this setting is inherited across fork/exec. + + [1] The default default is: the thread keyring if there is one, otherwise + the process keyring if there is one, otherwise the session keyring if + there is one, otherwise the user default session keyring. =============== @@ -601,17 +632,14 @@ be broken down into two areas: keys and key types. Dealing with keys is fairly straightforward. Firstly, the kernel service registers its type, then it searches for a key of that type. It should retain the key as long as it has need of it, and then it should release it. For a -filesystem or device file, a search would probably be performed during the -open call, and the key released upon close. How to deal with conflicting keys -due to two different users opening the same file is left to the filesystem -author to solve. - -When accessing a key's payload data, key->lock should be at least read locked, -or else the data may be changed by an update being performed from userspace -whilst the driver or filesystem is trying to access it. If no update method is -supplied, then the key's payload may be accessed without holding a lock as -there is no way to change it, provided it can be guaranteed that the key's -type definition won't go away. +filesystem or device file, a search would probably be performed during the open +call, and the key released upon close. How to deal with conflicting keys due to +two different users opening the same file is left to the filesystem author to +solve. + +When accessing a key's payload contents, certain precautions must be taken to +prevent access vs modification races. See the section "Notes on accessing +payload contents" for more information. (*) To search for a key, call: @@ -629,6 +657,9 @@ type definition won't go away. Should the function fail error ENOKEY, EKEYEXPIRED or EKEYREVOKED will be returned. + If successful, the key will have been attached to the default keyring for + implicitly obtained request-key keys, as set by KEYCTL_SET_REQKEY_KEYRING. + (*) When it is no longer required, the key should be released using: @@ -690,6 +721,54 @@ type definition won't go away. void unregister_key_type(struct key_type *type); +=================================== +NOTES ON ACCESSING PAYLOAD CONTENTS +=================================== + +The simplest payload is just a number in key->payload.value. In this case, +there's no need to indulge in RCU or locking when accessing the payload. + +More complex payload contents must be allocated and a pointer to them set in +key->payload.data. One of the following ways must be selected to access the +data: + + (1) Unmodifyable key type. + + If the key type does not have a modify method, then the key's payload can + be accessed without any form of locking, provided that it's known to be + instantiated (uninstantiated keys cannot be "found"). + + (2) The key's semaphore. + + The semaphore could be used to govern access to the payload and to control + the payload pointer. It must be write-locked for modifications and would + have to be read-locked for general access. The disadvantage of doing this + is that the accessor may be required to sleep. + + (3) RCU. + + RCU must be used when the semaphore isn't already held; if the semaphore + is held then the contents can't change under you unexpectedly as the + semaphore must still be used to serialise modifications to the key. The + key management code takes care of this for the key type. + + However, this means using: + + rcu_read_lock() ... rcu_dereference() ... rcu_read_unlock() + + to read the pointer, and: + + rcu_dereference() ... rcu_assign_pointer() ... call_rcu() + + to set the pointer and dispose of the old contents after a grace period. + Note that only the key type should ever modify a key's payload. + + Furthermore, an RCU controlled payload must hold a struct rcu_head for the + use of call_rcu() and, if the payload is of variable size, the length of + the payload. key->datalen cannot be relied upon to be consistent with the + payload just dereferenced if the key's semaphore is not held. + + =================== DEFINING A KEY TYPE =================== @@ -717,15 +796,15 @@ The structure has a number of fields, some of which are mandatory: int key_payload_reserve(struct key *key, size_t datalen); - With the revised data length. Error EDQUOT will be returned if this is - not viable. + With the revised data length. Error EDQUOT will be returned if this is not + viable. (*) int (*instantiate)(struct key *key, const void *data, size_t datalen); This method is called to attach a payload to a key during construction. - The payload attached need not bear any relation to the data passed to - this function. + The payload attached need not bear any relation to the data passed to this + function. If the amount of data attached to the key differs from the size in keytype->def_datalen, then key_payload_reserve() should be called. @@ -734,38 +813,47 @@ The structure has a number of fields, some of which are mandatory: The fact that KEY_FLAG_INSTANTIATED is not set in key->flags prevents anything else from gaining access to the key. - This method may sleep if it wishes. + It is safe to sleep in this method. (*) int (*duplicate)(struct key *key, const struct key *source); If this type of key can be duplicated, then this method should be - provided. It is called to copy the payload attached to the source into - the new key. The data length on the new key will have been updated and - the quota adjusted already. + provided. It is called to copy the payload attached to the source into the + new key. The data length on the new key will have been updated and the + quota adjusted already. This method will be called with the source key's semaphore read-locked to - prevent its payload from being changed. It is safe to sleep here. + prevent its payload from being changed, thus RCU constraints need not be + applied to the source key. + + This method does not have to lock the destination key in order to attach a + payload. The fact that KEY_FLAG_INSTANTIATED is not set in key->flags + prevents anything else from gaining access to the key. + + It is safe to sleep in this method. (*) int (*update)(struct key *key, const void *data, size_t datalen); - If this type of key can be updated, then this method should be - provided. It is called to update a key's payload from the blob of data - provided. + If this type of key can be updated, then this method should be provided. + It is called to update a key's payload from the blob of data provided. key_payload_reserve() should be called if the data length might change - before any changes are actually made. Note that if this succeeds, the - type is committed to changing the key because it's already been altered, - so all memory allocation must be done first. + before any changes are actually made. Note that if this succeeds, the type + is committed to changing the key because it's already been altered, so all + memory allocation must be done first. + + The key will have its semaphore write-locked before this method is called, + but this only deters other writers; any changes to the key's payload must + be made under RCU conditions, and call_rcu() must be used to dispose of + the old payload. - key_payload_reserve() should be called with the key->lock write locked, - and the changes to the key's attached payload should be made before the - key is locked. + key_payload_reserve() should be called before the changes are made, but + after all allocations and other potentially failing function calls are + made. - The key will have its semaphore write-locked before this method is - called. Any changes to the key should be made with the key's rwlock - write-locked also. It is safe to sleep here. + It is safe to sleep in this method. (*) int (*match)(const struct key *key, const void *desc); @@ -782,12 +870,12 @@ The structure has a number of fields, some of which are mandatory: (*) void (*destroy)(struct key *key); - This method is optional. It is called to discard the payload data on a - key when it is being destroyed. + This method is optional. It is called to discard the payload data on a key + when it is being destroyed. - This method does not need to lock the key; it can consider the key as - being inaccessible. Note that the key's type may have changed before this - function is called. + This method does not need to lock the key to access the payload; it can + consider the key as being inaccessible at this time. Note that the key's + type may have been changed before this function is called. It is not safe to sleep in this method; the caller may hold spinlocks. @@ -797,26 +885,31 @@ The structure has a number of fields, some of which are mandatory: This method is optional. It is called during /proc/keys reading to summarise a key's description and payload in text form. - This method will be called with the key's rwlock read-locked. This will - prevent the key's payload and state changing; also the description should - not change. This also means it is not safe to sleep in this method. + This method will be called with the RCU read lock held. rcu_dereference() + should be used to read the payload pointer if the payload is to be + accessed. key->datalen cannot be trusted to stay consistent with the + contents of the payload. + + The description will not change, though the key's state may. + + It is not safe to sleep in this method; the RCU read lock is held by the + caller. (*) long (*read)(const struct key *key, char __user *buffer, size_t buflen); This method is optional. It is called by KEYCTL_READ to translate the - key's payload into something a blob of data for userspace to deal - with. Ideally, the blob should be in the same format as that passed in to - the instantiate and update methods. + key's payload into something a blob of data for userspace to deal with. + Ideally, the blob should be in the same format as that passed in to the + instantiate and update methods. If successful, the blob size that could be produced should be returned rather than the size copied. - This method will be called with the key's semaphore read-locked. This - will prevent the key's payload changing. It is not necessary to also - read-lock key->lock when accessing the key's payload. It is safe to sleep - in this method, such as might happen when the userspace buffer is - accessed. + This method will be called with the key's semaphore read-locked. This will + prevent the key's payload changing. It is not necessary to use RCU locking + when accessing the key's payload. It is safe to sleep in this method, such + as might happen when the userspace buffer is accessed. ============================ @@ -853,8 +946,8 @@ If it returns with the key remaining in the unconstructed state, the key will be marked as being negative, it will be added to the session keyring, and an error will be returned to the key requestor. -Supplementary information may be provided from whoever or whatever invoked -this service. This will be passed as the <callout_info> parameter. If no such +Supplementary information may be provided from whoever or whatever invoked this +service. This will be passed as the <callout_info> parameter. If no such information was made available, then "-" will be passed as this parameter instead. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/00-INDEX b/Documentation/networking/00-INDEX index 834993d..5b01d5c 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/networking/00-INDEX @@ -114,9 +114,7 @@ tuntap.txt vortex.txt - info on using 3Com Vortex (3c590, 3c592, 3c595, 3c597) Ethernet cards. wan-router.txt - - Wan router documentation -wanpipe.txt - - WANPIPE(tm) Multiprotocol WAN Driver for Linux WAN Router + - WAN router documentation wavelan.txt - AT&T GIS (nee NCR) WaveLAN card: An Ethernet-like radio transceiver x25.txt diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dmfe.txt b/Documentation/networking/dmfe.txt index c0e8398..0463635 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/dmfe.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/dmfe.txt @@ -1,59 +1,65 @@ - dmfe.c: Version 1.28 01/18/2000 +Davicom DM9102(A)/DM9132/DM9801 fast ethernet driver for Linux. - A Davicom DM9102(A)/DM9132/DM9801 fast ethernet driver for Linux. - Copyright (C) 1997 Sten Wang +This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or +modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License +as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 +of the License, or (at your option) any later version. - This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or - modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License - as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 - of the License, or (at your option) any later version. +This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +GNU General Public License for more details. - This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, - but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of - MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the - GNU General Public License for more details. +This driver provides kernel support for Davicom DM9102(A)/DM9132/DM9801 ethernet cards ( CNET +10/100 ethernet cards uses Davicom chipset too, so this driver supports CNET cards too ).If you +didn't compile this driver as a module, it will automatically load itself on boot and print a +line similar to : - A. Compiler command: + dmfe: Davicom DM9xxx net driver, version 1.36.4 (2002-01-17) - A-1: For normal single or multiple processor kernel - "gcc -DMODULE -D__KERNEL__ -I/usr/src/linux/net/inet -Wall - -Wstrict-prototypes -O6 -c dmfe.c" +If you compiled this driver as a module, you have to load it on boot.You can load it with command : - A-2: For single or multiple processor with kernel module version function - "gcc -DMODULE -DMODVERSIONS -D__KERNEL__ -I/usr/src/linux/net/inet - -Wall -Wstrict-prototypes -O6 -c dmfe.c" + insmod dmfe +This way it will autodetect the device mode.This is the suggested way to load the module.Or you can pass +a mode= setting to module while loading, like : - B. The following steps teach you how to activate a DM9102 board: + insmod dmfe mode=0 # Force 10M Half Duplex + insmod dmfe mode=1 # Force 100M Half Duplex + insmod dmfe mode=4 # Force 10M Full Duplex + insmod dmfe mode=5 # Force 100M Full Duplex - 1. Used the upper compiler command to compile dmfe.c +Next you should configure your network interface with a command similar to : - 2. Insert dmfe module into kernel - "insmod dmfe" ;;Auto Detection Mode (Suggest) - "insmod dmfe mode=0" ;;Force 10M Half Duplex - "insmod dmfe mode=1" ;;Force 100M Half Duplex - "insmod dmfe mode=4" ;;Force 10M Full Duplex - "insmod dmfe mode=5" ;;Force 100M Full Duplex + ifconfig eth0 172.22.3.18 + ^^^^^^^^^^^ + Your IP Adress - 3. Config a dm9102 network interface - "ifconfig eth0 172.22.3.18" - ^^^^^^^^^^^ Your IP address +Then you may have to modify the default routing table with command : - 4. Activate the IP routing table. For some distributions, it is not - necessary. You can type "route" to check. + route add default eth0 - "route add default eth0" +Now your ethernet card should be up and running. - 5. Well done. Your DM9102 adapter is now activated. +TODO: - C. Object files description: - 1. dmfe_rh61.o: For Redhat 6.1 +Implement pci_driver::suspend() and pci_driver::resume() power management methods. +Check on 64 bit boxes. +Check and fix on big endian boxes. +Test and make sure PCI latency is now correct for all cases. - If you can make sure your kernel version, you can rename - to dmfe.o and directly use it without re-compiling. +Authors: - Author: Sten Wang, 886-3-5798797-8517, E-mail: sten_wang@davicom.com.tw +Sten Wang <sten_wang@davicom.com.tw > : Original Author +Tobias Ringstrom <tori@unhappy.mine.nu> : Current Maintainer + +Contributors: + +Marcelo Tosatti <marcelo@conectiva.com.br> +Alan Cox <alan@redhat.com> +Jeff Garzik <jgarzik@pobox.com> +Vojtech Pavlik <vojtech@suse.cz> diff --git a/Documentation/networking/generic-hdlc.txt b/Documentation/networking/generic-hdlc.txt index 7d1dc6b..31bc8b7 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/generic-hdlc.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/generic-hdlc.txt @@ -1,21 +1,21 @@ Generic HDLC layer Krzysztof Halasa <khc@pm.waw.pl> -January, 2003 Generic HDLC layer currently supports: -- Frame Relay (ANSI, CCITT and no LMI), with ARP support (no InARP). - Normal (routed) and Ethernet-bridged (Ethernet device emulation) - interfaces can share a single PVC. -- raw HDLC - either IP (IPv4) interface or Ethernet device emulation. -- Cisco HDLC, -- PPP (uses syncppp.c), -- X.25 (uses X.25 routines). - -There are hardware drivers for the following cards: -- C101 by Moxa Technologies Co., Ltd. -- RISCom/N2 by SDL Communications Inc. -- and others, some not in the official kernel. +1. Frame Relay (ANSI, CCITT, Cisco and no LMI). + - Normal (routed) and Ethernet-bridged (Ethernet device emulation) + interfaces can share a single PVC. + - ARP support (no InARP support in the kernel - there is an + experimental InARP user-space daemon available on: + http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/net/hdlc/). +2. raw HDLC - either IP (IPv4) interface or Ethernet device emulation. +3. Cisco HDLC. +4. PPP (uses syncppp.c). +5. X.25 (uses X.25 routines). + +Generic HDLC is a protocol driver only - it needs a low-level driver +for your particular hardware. Ethernet device emulation (using HDLC or Frame-Relay PVC) is compatible with IEEE 802.1Q (VLANs) and 802.1D (Ethernet bridging). @@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ with IEEE 802.1Q (VLANs) and 802.1D (Ethernet bridging). Make sure the hdlc.o and the hardware driver are loaded. It should create a number of "hdlc" (hdlc0 etc) network devices, one for each WAN port. You'll need the "sethdlc" utility, get it from: - http://hq.pm.waw.pl/hdlc/ + http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/net/hdlc/ Compile sethdlc.c utility: gcc -O2 -Wall -o sethdlc sethdlc.c @@ -52,12 +52,12 @@ Setting interface: * v35 | rs232 | x21 | t1 | e1 - sets physical interface for a given port if the card has software-selectable interfaces loopback - activate hardware loopback (for testing only) -* clock ext - external clock (uses DTE RX and TX clock) -* clock int - internal clock (provides clock signal on DCE clock output) -* clock txint - TX internal, RX external (provides TX clock on DCE output) -* clock txfromrx - TX clock derived from RX clock (TX clock on DCE output) -* rate - sets clock rate in bps (not required for external clock or - for txfromrx) +* clock ext - both RX clock and TX clock external +* clock int - both RX clock and TX clock internal +* clock txint - RX clock external, TX clock internal +* clock txfromrx - RX clock external, TX clock derived from RX clock +* rate - sets clock rate in bps (for "int" or "txint" clock only) + Setting protocol: @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Setting protocol: * x25 - sets X.25 mode * fr - Frame Relay mode - lmi ansi / ccitt / none - LMI (link management) type + lmi ansi / ccitt / cisco / none - LMI (link management) type dce - Frame Relay DCE (network) side LMI instead of default DTE (user). It has nothing to do with clocks! t391 - link integrity verification polling timer (in seconds) - user @@ -119,13 +119,14 @@ or -If you have a problem with N2 or C101 card, you can issue the "private" -command to see port's packet descriptor rings (in kernel logs): +If you have a problem with N2, C101 or PLX200SYN card, you can issue the +"private" command to see port's packet descriptor rings (in kernel logs): sethdlc hdlc0 private -The hardware driver has to be build with CONFIG_HDLC_DEBUG_RINGS. +The hardware driver has to be build with #define DEBUG_RINGS. Attaching this info to bug reports would be helpful. Anyway, let me know if you have problems using this. -For patches and other info look at http://hq.pm.waw.pl/hdlc/ +For patches and other info look at: +<http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/net/hdlc/>. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt b/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt index a2c893a7..ab65714 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt @@ -304,57 +304,6 @@ tcp_low_latency - BOOLEAN changed would be a Beowulf compute cluster. Default: 0 -tcp_westwood - BOOLEAN - Enable TCP Westwood+ congestion control algorithm. - TCP Westwood+ is a sender-side only modification of the TCP Reno - protocol stack that optimizes the performance of TCP congestion - control. It is based on end-to-end bandwidth estimation to set - congestion window and slow start threshold after a congestion - episode. Using this estimation, TCP Westwood+ adaptively sets a - slow start threshold and a congestion window which takes into - account the bandwidth used at the time congestion is experienced. - TCP Westwood+ significantly increases fairness wrt TCP Reno in - wired networks and throughput over wireless links. - Default: 0 - -tcp_vegas_cong_avoid - BOOLEAN - Enable TCP Vegas congestion avoidance algorithm. - TCP Vegas is a sender-side only change to TCP that anticipates - the onset of congestion by estimating the bandwidth. TCP Vegas - adjusts the sending rate by modifying the congestion - window. TCP Vegas should provide less packet loss, but it is - not as aggressive as TCP Reno. - Default:0 - -tcp_bic - BOOLEAN - Enable BIC TCP congestion control algorithm. - BIC-TCP is a sender-side only change that ensures a linear RTT - fairness under large windows while offering both scalability and - bounded TCP-friendliness. The protocol combines two schemes - called additive increase and binary search increase. When the - congestion window is large, additive increase with a large - increment ensures linear RTT fairness as well as good - scalability. Under small congestion windows, binary search - increase provides TCP friendliness. - Default: 0 - -tcp_bic_low_window - INTEGER - Sets the threshold window (in packets) where BIC TCP starts to - adjust the congestion window. Below this threshold BIC TCP behaves - the same as the default TCP Reno. - Default: 14 - -tcp_bic_fast_convergence - BOOLEAN - Forces BIC TCP to more quickly respond to changes in congestion - window. Allows two flows sharing the same connection to converge - more rapidly. - Default: 1 - -tcp_default_win_scale - INTEGER - Sets the minimum window scale TCP will negotiate for on all - conections. - Default: 7 - tcp_tso_win_divisor - INTEGER This allows control over what percentage of the congestion window can be consumed by a single TSO frame. @@ -368,6 +317,11 @@ tcp_frto - BOOLEAN where packet loss is typically due to random radio interference rather than intermediate router congestion. +tcp_congestion_control - STRING + Set the congestion control algorithm to be used for new + connections. The algorithm "reno" is always available, but + additional choices may be available based on kernel configuration. + somaxconn - INTEGER Limit of socket listen() backlog, known in userspace as SOMAXCONN. Defaults to 128. See also tcp_max_syn_backlog for additional tuning diff --git a/Documentation/networking/multicast.txt b/Documentation/networking/multicast.txt index 5049a64..b06c8c6 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/multicast.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/multicast.txt @@ -47,7 +47,6 @@ ni52 <------------------ Buggy ------------------> ni65 YES YES YES Software(#) seeq NO NO NO N/A sgiseek <------------------ Buggy ------------------> -sk_g16 NO NO YES N/A smc-ultra YES YES YES Hardware sunlance YES YES YES Hardware tulip YES YES YES Hardware diff --git a/Documentation/networking/net-modules.txt b/Documentation/networking/net-modules.txt index 3830a83..0b27863 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/net-modules.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/net-modules.txt @@ -284,9 +284,6 @@ ppp.c: seeq8005.c: *Not modularized* (Probes ports: 0x300, 0x320, 0x340, 0x360) -sk_g16.c: *Not modularized* - (Probes ports: 0x100, 0x180, 0x208, 0x220m 0x288, 0x320, 0x328, 0x390) - skeleton.c: *Skeleton* slhc.c: diff --git a/Documentation/networking/tcp.txt b/Documentation/networking/tcp.txt index 7174900..0fa3004 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/tcp.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/tcp.txt @@ -1,5 +1,72 @@ -How the new TCP output machine [nyi] works. +TCP protocol +============ + +Last updated: 21 June 2005 + +Contents +======== + +- Congestion control +- How the new TCP output machine [nyi] works + +Congestion control +================== + +The following variables are used in the tcp_sock for congestion control: +snd_cwnd The size of the congestion window +snd_ssthresh Slow start threshold. We are in slow start if + snd_cwnd is less than this. +snd_cwnd_cnt A counter used to slow down the rate of increase + once we exceed slow start threshold. +snd_cwnd_clamp This is the maximum size that snd_cwnd can grow to. +snd_cwnd_stamp Timestamp for when congestion window last validated. +snd_cwnd_used Used as a highwater mark for how much of the + congestion window is in use. It is used to adjust + snd_cwnd down when the link is limited by the + application rather than the network. + +As of 2.6.13, Linux supports pluggable congestion control algorithms. +A congestion control mechanism can be registered through functions in +tcp_cong.c. The functions used by the congestion control mechanism are +registered via passing a tcp_congestion_ops struct to +tcp_register_congestion_control. As a minimum name, ssthresh, +cong_avoid, min_cwnd must be valid. +Private data for a congestion control mechanism is stored in tp->ca_priv. +tcp_ca(tp) returns a pointer to this space. This is preallocated space - it +is important to check the size of your private data will fit this space, or +alternatively space could be allocated elsewhere and a pointer to it could +be stored here. + +There are three kinds of congestion control algorithms currently: The +simplest ones are derived from TCP reno (highspeed, scalable) and just +provide an alternative the congestion window calculation. More complex +ones like BIC try to look at other events to provide better +heuristics. There are also round trip time based algorithms like +Vegas and Westwood+. + +Good TCP congestion control is a complex problem because the algorithm +needs to maintain fairness and performance. Please review current +research and RFC's before developing new modules. + +The method that is used to determine which congestion control mechanism is +determined by the setting of the sysctl net.ipv4.tcp_congestion_control. +The default congestion control will be the last one registered (LIFO); +so if you built everything as modules. the default will be reno. If you +build with the default's from Kconfig, then BIC will be builtin (not a module) +and it will end up the default. + +If you really want a particular default value then you will need +to set it with the sysctl. If you use a sysctl, the module will be autoloaded +if needed and you will get the expected protocol. If you ask for an +unknown congestion method, then the sysctl attempt will fail. + +If you remove a tcp congestion control module, then you will get the next +available one. Since reno can not be built as a module, and can not be +deleted, it will always be available. + +How the new TCP output machine [nyi] works. +=========================================== Data is kept on a single queue. The skb->users flag tells us if the frame is one that has been queued already. To add a frame we throw it on the end. Ack diff --git a/Documentation/networking/vortex.txt b/Documentation/networking/vortex.txt index fa12a9e..80e1cb1 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/vortex.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/vortex.txt @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ Don is no longer the prime maintainer of this version of the driver. Please report problems to one or more of: Andrew Morton <andrewm@uow.edu.au> - Netdev mailing list <netdev@oss.sgi.com> + Netdev mailing list <netdev@vger.kernel.org> Linux kernel mailing list <linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org> Please note the 'Reporting and Diagnosing Problems' section at the end diff --git a/Documentation/networking/wanpipe.txt b/Documentation/networking/wanpipe.txt deleted file mode 100644 index aea20cd..0000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/wanpipe.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,622 +0,0 @@ ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -Linux WAN Router Utilities Package ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -Version 2.2.1 -Mar 28, 2001 -Author: Nenad Corbic <ncorbic@sangoma.com> -Copyright (c) 1995-2001 Sangoma Technologies Inc. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- - -INTRODUCTION - -Wide Area Networks (WANs) are used to interconnect Local Area Networks (LANs) -and/or stand-alone hosts over vast distances with data transfer rates -significantly higher than those achievable with commonly used dial-up -connections. - -Usually an external device called `WAN router' sitting on your local network -or connected to your machine's serial port provides physical connection to -WAN. Although router's job may be as simple as taking your local network -traffic, converting it to WAN format and piping it through the WAN link, these -devices are notoriously expensive, with prices as much as 2 - 5 times higher -then the price of a typical PC box. - -Alternatively, considering robustness and multitasking capabilities of Linux, -an internal router can be built (most routers use some sort of stripped down -Unix-like operating system anyway). With a number of relatively inexpensive WAN -interface cards available on the market, a perfectly usable router can be -built for less than half a price of an external router. Yet a Linux box -acting as a router can still be used for other purposes, such as fire-walling, -running FTP, WWW or DNS server, etc. - -This kernel module introduces the notion of a WAN Link Driver (WLD) to Linux -operating system and provides generic hardware-independent services for such -drivers. Why can existing Linux network device interface not be used for -this purpose? Well, it can. However, there are a few key differences between -a typical network interface (e.g. Ethernet) and a WAN link. - -Many WAN protocols, such as X.25 and frame relay, allow for multiple logical -connections (known as `virtual circuits' in X.25 terminology) over a single -physical link. Each such virtual circuit may (and almost always does) lead -to a different geographical location and, therefore, different network. As a -result, it is the virtual circuit, not the physical link, that represents a -route and, therefore, a network interface in Linux terms. - -To further complicate things, virtual circuits are usually volatile in nature -(excluding so called `permanent' virtual circuits or PVCs). With almost no -time required to set up and tear down a virtual circuit, it is highly desirable -to implement on-demand connections in order to minimize network charges. So -unlike a typical network driver, the WAN driver must be able to handle multiple -network interfaces and cope as multiple virtual circuits come into existence -and go away dynamically. - -Last, but not least, WAN configuration is much more complex than that of say -Ethernet and may well amount to several dozens of parameters. Some of them -are "link-wide" while others are virtual circuit-specific. The same holds -true for WAN statistics which is by far more extensive and extremely useful -when troubleshooting WAN connections. Extending the ifconfig utility to suit -these needs may be possible, but does not seem quite reasonable. Therefore, a -WAN configuration utility and corresponding application programmer's interface -is needed for this purpose. - -Most of these problems are taken care of by this module. Its goal is to -provide a user with more-or-less standard look and feel for all WAN devices and -assist a WAN device driver writer by providing common services, such as: - - o User-level interface via /proc file system - o Centralized configuration - o Device management (setup, shutdown, etc.) - o Network interface management (dynamic creation/destruction) - o Protocol encapsulation/decapsulation - -To ba able to use the Linux WAN Router you will also need a WAN Tools package -available from - - ftp.sangoma.com/pub/linux/current_wanpipe/wanpipe-X.Y.Z.tgz - -where vX.Y.Z represent the wanpipe version number. - -For technical questions and/or comments please e-mail to ncorbic@sangoma.com. -For general inquiries please contact Sangoma Technologies Inc. by - - Hotline: 1-800-388-2475 (USA and Canada, toll free) - Phone: (905) 474-1990 ext: 106 - Fax: (905) 474-9223 - E-mail: dm@sangoma.com (David Mandelstam) - WWW: http://www.sangoma.com - - -INSTALLATION - -Please read the WanpipeForLinux.pdf manual on how to -install the WANPIPE tools and drivers properly. - - -After installing wanpipe package: /usr/local/wanrouter/doc. -On the ftp.sangoma.com : /linux/current_wanpipe/doc - - -COPYRIGHT AND LICENSING INFORMATION - -This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under -the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software -Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. - -This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT -ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS -FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. - -You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with -this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass -Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA. - - - -ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS - -This product is based on the WANPIPE(tm) Multiprotocol WAN Router developed -by Sangoma Technologies Inc. for Linux 2.0.x and 2.2.x. Success of the WANPIPE -together with the next major release of Linux kernel in summer 1996 commanded -adequate changes to the WANPIPE code to take full advantage of new Linux -features. - -Instead of continuing developing proprietary interface tied to Sangoma WAN -cards, we decided to separate all hardware-independent code into a separate -module and defined two levels of interfaces - one for user-level applications -and another for kernel-level WAN drivers. WANPIPE is now implemented as a -WAN driver compliant with the WAN Link Driver interface. Also a general -purpose WAN configuration utility and a set of shell scripts was developed to -support WAN router at the user level. - -Many useful ideas concerning hardware-independent interface implementation -were given by Mike McLagan <mike.mclagan@linux.org> and his implementation -of the Frame Relay router and drivers for Sangoma cards (dlci/sdla). - -With the new implementation of the APIs being incorporated into the WANPIPE, -a special thank goes to Alan Cox in providing insight into BSD sockets. - -Special thanks to all the WANPIPE users who performed field-testing, reported -bugs and made valuable comments and suggestions that help us to improve this -product. - - - -NEW IN THIS RELEASE - - o Updated the WANCFG utility - Calls the pppconfig to configure the PPPD - for async connections. - - o Added the PPPCONFIG utility - Used to configure the PPPD dameon for the - WANPIPE Async PPP and standard serial port. - The wancfg calls the pppconfig to configure - the pppd. - - o Fixed the PCI autodetect feature. - The SLOT 0 was used as an autodetect option - however, some high end PC's slot numbers start - from 0. - - o This release has been tested with the new backupd - daemon release. - - -PRODUCT COMPONENTS AND RELATED FILES - -/etc: (or user defined) - wanpipe1.conf default router configuration file - -/lib/modules/X.Y.Z/misc: - wanrouter.o router kernel loadable module - af_wanpipe.o wanpipe api socket module - -/lib/modules/X.Y.Z/net: - sdladrv.o Sangoma SDLA support module - wanpipe.o Sangoma WANPIPE(tm) driver module - -/proc/net/wanrouter - Config reads current router configuration - Status reads current router status - {name} reads WAN driver statistics - -/usr/sbin: - wanrouter wanrouter start-up script - wanconfig wanrouter configuration utility - sdladump WANPIPE adapter memory dump utility - fpipemon Monitor for Frame Relay - cpipemon Monitor for Cisco HDLC - ppipemon Monitor for PPP - xpipemon Monitor for X25 - wpkbdmon WANPIPE keyboard led monitor/debugger - -/usr/local/wanrouter: - README this file - COPYING GNU General Public License - Setup installation script - Filelist distribution definition file - wanrouter.rc meta-configuration file - (used by the Setup and wanrouter script) - -/usr/local/wanrouter/doc: - wanpipeForLinux.pdf WAN Router User's Manual - -/usr/local/wanrouter/patches: - wanrouter-v2213.gz patch for Linux kernels 2.2.11 up to 2.2.13. - wanrouter-v2214.gz patch for Linux kernel 2.2.14. - wanrouter-v2215.gz patch for Linux kernels 2.2.15 to 2.2.17. - wanrouter-v2218.gz patch for Linux kernels 2.2.18 and up. - wanrouter-v240.gz patch for Linux kernel 2.4.0. - wanrouter-v242.gz patch for Linux kernel 2.4.2 and up. - wanrouter-v2034.gz patch for Linux kernel 2.0.34 - wanrouter-v2036.gz patch for Linux kernel 2.0.36 and up. - -/usr/local/wanrouter/patches/kdrivers: - Sources of the latest WANPIPE device drivers. - These are used to UPGRADE the linux kernel to the newest - version if the kernel source has already been pathced with - WANPIPE drivers. - -/usr/local/wanrouter/samples: - interface sample interface configuration file - wanpipe1.cpri CHDLC primary port - wanpipe2.csec CHDLC secondary port - wanpipe1.fr Frame Relay protocol - wanpipe1.ppp PPP protocol ) - wanpipe1.asy CHDLC ASYNC protocol - wanpipe1.x25 X25 protocol - wanpipe1.stty Sync TTY driver (Used by Kernel PPPD daemon) - wanpipe1.atty Async TTY driver (Used by Kernel PPPD daemon) - wanrouter.rc sample meta-configuration file - -/usr/local/wanrouter/util: - * wan-tools utilities source code - -/usr/local/wanrouter/api/x25: - * x25 api sample programs. -/usr/local/wanrouter/api/chdlc: - * chdlc api sample programs. -/usr/local/wanrouter/api/fr: - * fr api sample programs. -/usr/local/wanrouter/config/wancfg: - wancfg WANPIPE GUI configuration program. - Creates wanpipe#.conf files. -/usr/local/wanrouter/config/cfgft1: - cfgft1 GUI CSU/DSU configuration program. - -/usr/include/linux: - wanrouter.h router API definitions - wanpipe.h WANPIPE API definitions - sdladrv.h SDLA support module API definitions - sdlasfm.h SDLA firmware module definitions - if_wanpipe.h WANPIPE Socket definitions - if_wanpipe_common.h WANPIPE Socket/Driver common definitions. - sdlapci.h WANPIPE PCI definitions - - -/usr/src/linux/net/wanrouter: - * wanrouter source code - -/var/log: - wanrouter wanrouter start-up log (created by the Setup script) - -/var/lock: (or /var/lock/subsys for RedHat) - wanrouter wanrouter lock file (created by the Setup script) - -/usr/local/wanrouter/firmware: - fr514.sfm Frame relay firmware for Sangoma S508/S514 card - cdual514.sfm Dual Port Cisco HDLC firmware for Sangoma S508/S514 card - ppp514.sfm PPP Firmware for Sangoma S508 and S514 cards - x25_508.sfm X25 Firmware for Sangoma S508 card. - - -REVISION HISTORY - -1.0.0 December 31, 1996 Initial version - -1.0.1 January 30, 1997 Status and statistics can be read via /proc - filesystem entries. - -1.0.2 April 30, 1997 Added UDP management via monitors. - -1.0.3 June 3, 1997 UDP management for multiple boards using Frame - Relay and PPP - Enabled continuous transmission of Configure - Request Packet for PPP (for 508 only) - Connection Timeout for PPP changed from 900 to 0 - Flow Control Problem fixed for Frame Relay - -1.0.4 July 10, 1997 S508/FT1 monitoring capability in fpipemon and - ppipemon utilities. - Configurable TTL for UDP packets. - Multicast and Broadcast IP source addresses are - silently discarded. - -1.0.5 July 28, 1997 Configurable T391,T392,N391,N392,N393 for Frame - Relay in router.conf. - Configurable Memory Address through router.conf - for Frame Relay, PPP and X.25. (commenting this - out enables auto-detection). - Fixed freeing up received buffers using kfree() - for Frame Relay and X.25. - Protect sdla_peek() by calling save_flags(), - cli() and restore_flags(). - Changed number of Trace elements from 32 to 20 - Added DLCI specific data monitoring in FPIPEMON. -2.0.0 Nov 07, 1997 Implemented protection of RACE conditions by - critical flags for FRAME RELAY and PPP. - DLCI List interrupt mode implemented. - IPX support in FRAME RELAY and PPP. - IPX Server Support (MARS) - More driver specific stats included in FPIPEMON - and PIPEMON. - -2.0.1 Nov 28, 1997 Bug Fixes for version 2.0.0. - Protection of "enable_irq()" while - "disable_irq()" has been enabled from any other - routine (for Frame Relay, PPP and X25). - Added additional Stats for Fpipemon and Ppipemon - Improved Load Sharing for multiple boards - -2.0.2 Dec 09, 1997 Support for PAP and CHAP for ppp has been - implemented. - -2.0.3 Aug 15, 1998 New release supporting Cisco HDLC, CIR for Frame - relay, Dynamic IP assignment for PPP and Inverse - Arp support for Frame-relay. Man Pages are - included for better support and a new utility - for configuring FT1 cards. - -2.0.4 Dec 09, 1998 Dual Port support for Cisco HDLC. - Support for HDLC (LAPB) API. - Supports BiSync Streaming code for S502E - and S503 cards. - Support for Streaming HDLC API. - Provides a BSD socket interface for - creating applications using BiSync - streaming. - -2.0.5 Aug 04, 1999 CHDLC initializatin bug fix. - PPP interrupt driven driver: - Fix to the PPP line hangup problem. - New PPP firmware - Added comments to the startup SYSTEM ERROR messages - Xpipemon debugging application for the X25 protocol - New USER_MANUAL.txt - Fixed the odd boundary 4byte writes to the board. - BiSync Streaming code has been taken out. - Available as a patch. - Streaming HDLC API has been taken out. - Available as a patch. - -2.0.6 Aug 17, 1999 Increased debugging in statup scripts - Fixed insallation bugs from 2.0.5 - Kernel patch works for both 2.2.10 and 2.2.11 kernels. - There is no functional difference between the two packages - -2.0.7 Aug 26, 1999 o Merged X25API code into WANPIPE. - o Fixed a memeory leak for X25API - o Updated the X25API code for 2.2.X kernels. - o Improved NEM handling. - -2.1.0 Oct 25, 1999 o New code for S514 PCI Card - o New CHDLC and Frame Relay drivers - o PPP and X25 are not supported in this release - -2.1.1 Nov 30, 1999 o PPP support for S514 PCI Cards - -2.1.3 Apr 06, 2000 o Socket based x25api - o Socket based chdlc api - o Socket based fr api - o Dual Port Receive only CHDLC support. - o Asynchronous CHDLC support (Secondary Port) - o cfgft1 GUI csu/dsu configurator - o wancfg GUI configuration file - configurator. - o Architectual directory changes. - -beta-2.1.4 Jul 2000 o Dynamic interface configuration: - Network interfaces reflect the state - of protocol layer. If the protocol becomes - disconnected, driver will bring down - the interface. Once the protocol reconnects - the interface will be brought up. - - Note: This option is turned off by default. - - o Dynamic wanrouter setup using 'wanconfig': - wanconfig utility can be used to - shutdown,restart,start or reconfigure - a virtual circuit dynamically. - - Frame Relay: Each DLCI can be: - created,stopped,restarted and reconfigured - dynamically using wanconfig. - - ex: wanconfig card wanpipe1 dev wp1_fr16 up - - o Wanrouter startup via command line arguments: - wanconfig also supports wanrouter startup via command line - arguments. Thus, there is no need to create a wanpipe#.conf - configuration file. - - o Socket based x25api update/bug fixes. - Added support for LCN numbers greater than 255. - Option to pass up modem messages. - Provided a PCI IRQ check, so a single S514 - card is guaranteed to have a non-sharing interrupt. - - o Fixes to the wancfg utility. - o New FT1 debugging support via *pipemon utilities. - o Frame Relay ARP support Enabled. - -beta3-2.1.4 Jul 2000 o X25 M_BIT Problem fix. - o Added the Multi-Port PPP - Updated utilites for the Multi-Port PPP. - -2.1.4 Aut 2000 - o In X25API: - Maximum packet an application can send - to the driver has been extended to 4096 bytes. - - Fixed the x25 startup bug. Enable - communications only after all interfaces - come up. HIGH SVC/PVC is used to calculate - the number of channels. - Enable protocol only after all interfaces - are enabled. - - o Added an extra state to the FT1 config, kernel module. - o Updated the pipemon debuggers. - - o Blocked the Multi-Port PPP from running on kernels - 2.2.16 or greater, due to syncppp kernel module - change. - -beta1-2.1.5 Nov 15 2000 - o Fixed the MulitPort PPP Support for kernels 2.2.16 and above. - 2.2.X kernels only - - o Secured the driver UDP debugging calls - - All illegal netowrk debugging calls are reported to - the log. - - Defined a set of allowed commands, all other denied. - - o Cpipemon - - Added set FT1 commands to the cpipemon. Thus CSU/DSU - configuraiton can be performed using cpipemon. - All systems that cannot run cfgft1 GUI utility should - use cpipemon to configure the on board CSU/DSU. - - - o Keyboard Led Monitor/Debugger - - A new utilty /usr/sbin/wpkbdmon uses keyboard leds - to convey operatinal statistic information of the - Sangoma WANPIPE cards. - NUM_LOCK = Line State (On=connected, Off=disconnected) - CAPS_LOCK = Tx data (On=transmitting, Off=no tx data) - SCROLL_LOCK = Rx data (On=receiving, Off=no rx data - - o Hardware probe on module load and dynamic device allocation - - During WANPIPE module load, all Sangoma cards are probed - and found information is printed in the /var/log/messages. - - If no cards are found, the module load fails. - - Appropriate number of devices are dynamically loaded - based on the number of Sangoma cards found. - - Note: The kernel configuraiton option - CONFIG_WANPIPE_CARDS has been taken out. - - o Fixed the Frame Relay and Chdlc network interfaces so they are - compatible with libpcap libraries. Meaning, tcpdump, snort, - ethereal, and all other packet sniffers and debuggers work on - all WANPIPE netowrk interfaces. - - Set the network interface encoding type to ARPHRD_PPP. - This tell the sniffers that data obtained from the - network interface is in pure IP format. - Fix for 2.2.X kernels only. - - o True interface encoding option for Frame Relay and CHDLC - - The above fix sets the network interface encoding - type to ARPHRD_PPP, however some customers use - the encoding interface type to determine the - protocol running. Therefore, the TURE ENCODING - option will set the interface type back to the - original value. - - NOTE: If this option is used with Frame Relay and CHDLC - libpcap library support will be broken. - i.e. tcpdump will not work. - Fix for 2.2.x Kernels only. - - o Ethernet Bridgind over Frame Relay - - The Frame Relay bridging has been developed by - Kristian Hoffmann and Mark Wells. - - The Linux kernel bridge is used to send ethernet - data over the frame relay links. - For 2.2.X Kernels only. - - o Added extensive 2.0.X support. Most new features of - 2.1.5 for protocols Frame Relay, PPP and CHDLC are - supported under 2.0.X kernels. - -beta1-2.2.0 Dec 30 2000 - o Updated drivers for 2.4.X kernels. - o Updated drivers for SMP support. - o X25API is now able to share PCI interrupts. - o Took out a general polling routine that was used - only by X25API. - o Added appropriate locks to the dynamic reconfiguration - code. - o Fixed a bug in the keyboard debug monitor. - -beta2-2.2.0 Jan 8 2001 - o Patches for 2.4.0 kernel - o Patches for 2.2.18 kernel - o Minor updates to PPP and CHLDC drivers. - Note: No functinal difference. - -beta3-2.2.9 Jan 10 2001 - o I missed the 2.2.18 kernel patches in beta2-2.2.0 - release. They are included in this release. - -Stable Release -2.2.0 Feb 01 2001 - o Bug fix in wancfg GUI configurator. - The edit function didn't work properly. - - -bata1-2.2.1 Feb 09 2001 - o WANPIPE TTY Driver emulation. - Two modes of operation Sync and Async. - Sync: Using the PPPD daemon, kernel SyncPPP layer - and the Wanpipe sync TTY driver: a PPP protocol - connection can be established via Sangoma adapter, over - a T1 leased line. - - The 2.4.0 kernel PPP layer supports MULTILINK - protocol, that can be used to bundle any number of Sangoma - adapters (T1 lines) into one, under a single IP address. - Thus, efficiently obtaining multiple T1 throughput. - - NOTE: The remote side must also implement MULTILINK PPP - protocol. - - Async:Using the PPPD daemon, kernel AsyncPPP layer - and the WANPIPE async TTY driver: a PPP protocol - connection can be established via Sangoma adapter and - a modem, over a telephone line. - - Thus, the WANPIPE async TTY driver simulates a serial - TTY driver that would normally be used to interface the - MODEM to the linux kernel. - - o WANPIPE PPP Backup Utility - This utility will monitor the state of the PPP T1 line. - In case of failure, a dial up connection will be established - via pppd daemon, ether via a serial tty driver (serial port), - or a WANPIPE async TTY driver (in case serial port is unavailable). - - Furthermore, while in dial up mode, the primary PPP T1 link - will be monitored for signs of life. - - If the PPP T1 link comes back to life, the dial up connection - will be shutdown and T1 line re-established. - - - o New Setup installation script. - Option to UPGRADE device drivers if the kernel source has - already been patched with WANPIPE. - - Option to COMPILE WANPIPE modules against the currently - running kernel, thus no need for manual kernel and module - re-compilatin. - - o Updates and Bug Fixes to wancfg utility. - -bata2-2.2.1 Feb 20 2001 - - o Bug fixes to the CHDLC device drivers. - The driver had compilation problems under kernels - 2.2.14 or lower. - - o Bug fixes to the Setup installation script. - The device drivers compilation options didn't work - properly. - - o Update to the wpbackupd daemon. - Optimized the cross-over times, between the primary - link and the backup dialup. - -beta3-2.2.1 Mar 02 2001 - o Patches for 2.4.2 kernel. - - o Bug fixes to util/ make files. - o Bug fixes to the Setup installation script. - - o Took out the backupd support and made it into - as separate package. - -beta4-2.2.1 Mar 12 2001 - - o Fix to the Frame Relay Device driver. - IPSAC sends a packet of zero length - header to the frame relay driver. The - driver tries to push its own 2 byte header - into the packet, which causes the driver to - crash. - - o Fix the WANPIPE re-configuration code. - Bug was found by trying to run the cfgft1 while the - interface was already running. - - o Updates to cfgft1. - Writes a wanpipe#.cfgft1 configuration file - once the CSU/DSU is configured. This file can - holds the current CSU/DSU configuration. - - - ->>>>>> END OF README <<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<< - - diff --git a/Documentation/power/kernel_threads.txt b/Documentation/power/kernel_threads.txt index 60b5481..fb57784 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/kernel_threads.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/kernel_threads.txt @@ -12,8 +12,7 @@ refrigerator. Code to do this looks like this: do { hub_events(); wait_event_interruptible(khubd_wait, !list_empty(&hub_event_list)); - if (current->flags & PF_FREEZE) - refrigerator(PF_FREEZE); + try_to_freeze(); } while (!signal_pending(current)); from drivers/usb/core/hub.c::hub_thread() diff --git a/Documentation/power/pci.txt b/Documentation/power/pci.txt index 35b1a7d..6fc9d51 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/pci.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/pci.txt @@ -291,6 +291,44 @@ a request to enable wake events from D3, two calls should be made to pci_enable_wake (one for both D3hot and D3cold). +A reference implementation +------------------------- +.suspend() +{ + /* driver specific operations */ + + /* Disable IRQ */ + free_irq(); + /* If using MSI */ + pci_disable_msi(); + + pci_save_state(); + pci_enable_wake(); + /* Disable IO/bus master/irq router */ + pci_disable_device(); + pci_set_power_state(pci_choose_state()); +} + +.resume() +{ + pci_set_power_state(PCI_D0); + pci_restore_state(); + /* device's irq possibly is changed, driver should take care */ + pci_enable_device(); + pci_set_master(); + + /* if using MSI, device's vector possibly is changed */ + pci_enable_msi(); + + request_irq(); + /* driver specific operations; */ +} + +This is a typical implementation. Drivers can slightly change the order +of the operations in the implementation, ignore some operations or add +more deriver specific operations in it, but drivers should do something like +this on the whole. + 5. Resources ~~~~~~~~~~~~ diff --git a/Documentation/power/swsusp.txt b/Documentation/power/swsusp.txt index c7c3459..7a6b789 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/swsusp.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/swsusp.txt @@ -164,11 +164,11 @@ place where the thread is safe to be frozen (no kernel semaphores should be held at that point and it must be safe to sleep there), and add: - if (current->flags & PF_FREEZE) - refrigerator(PF_FREEZE); + try_to_freeze(); If the thread is needed for writing the image to storage, you should -instead set the PF_NOFREEZE process flag when creating the thread. +instead set the PF_NOFREEZE process flag when creating the thread (and +be very carefull). Q: What is the difference between between "platform", "shutdown" and @@ -233,3 +233,81 @@ A: Try running cat `cat /proc/[0-9]*/maps | grep / | sed 's:.* /:/:' | sort -u` > /dev/null after resume. swapoff -a; swapon -a may also be usefull. + +Q: What happens to devices during swsusp? They seem to be resumed +during system suspend? + +A: That's correct. We need to resume them if we want to write image to +disk. Whole sequence goes like + + Suspend part + ~~~~~~~~~~~~ + running system, user asks for suspend-to-disk + + user processes are stopped + + suspend(PMSG_FREEZE): devices are frozen so that they don't interfere + with state snapshot + + state snapshot: copy of whole used memory is taken with interrupts disabled + + resume(): devices are woken up so that we can write image to swap + + write image to swap + + suspend(PMSG_SUSPEND): suspend devices so that we can power off + + turn the power off + + Resume part + ~~~~~~~~~~~ + (is actually pretty similar) + + running system, user asks for suspend-to-disk + + user processes are stopped (in common case there are none, but with resume-from-initrd, noone knows) + + read image from disk + + suspend(PMSG_FREEZE): devices are frozen so that they don't interfere + with image restoration + + image restoration: rewrite memory with image + + resume(): devices are woken up so that system can continue + + thaw all user processes + +Q: What is this 'Encrypt suspend image' for? + +A: First of all: it is not a replacement for dm-crypt encrypted swap. +It cannot protect your computer while it is suspended. Instead it does +protect from leaking sensitive data after resume from suspend. + +Think of the following: you suspend while an application is running +that keeps sensitive data in memory. The application itself prevents +the data from being swapped out. Suspend, however, must write these +data to swap to be able to resume later on. Without suspend encryption +your sensitive data are then stored in plaintext on disk. This means +that after resume your sensitive data are accessible to all +applications having direct access to the swap device which was used +for suspend. If you don't need swap after resume these data can remain +on disk virtually forever. Thus it can happen that your system gets +broken in weeks later and sensitive data which you thought were +encrypted and protected are retrieved and stolen from the swap device. +To prevent this situation you should use 'Encrypt suspend image'. + +During suspend a temporary key is created and this key is used to +encrypt the data written to disk. When, during resume, the data was +read back into memory the temporary key is destroyed which simply +means that all data written to disk during suspend are then +inaccessible so they can't be stolen later on. The only thing that +you must then take care of is that you call 'mkswap' for the swap +partition used for suspend as early as possible during regular +boot. This asserts that any temporary key from an oopsed suspend or +from a failed or aborted resume is erased from the swap device. + +As a rule of thumb use encrypted swap to protect your data while your +system is shut down or suspended. Additionally use the encrypted +suspend image to prevent sensitive data from being stolen after +resume. diff --git a/Documentation/power/video.txt b/Documentation/power/video.txt index 6873435..881a37e 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/video.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/video.txt @@ -83,8 +83,10 @@ Compaq Armada E500 - P3-700 none (1) (S1 also works OK) Compaq Evo N620c vga=normal, s3_bios (2) Dell 600m, ATI R250 Lf none (1), but needs xorg-x11-6.8.1.902-1 Dell D600, ATI RV250 vga=normal and X, or try vbestate (6) +Dell D610 vga=normal and X (possibly vbestate (6) too, but not tested) Dell Inspiron 4000 ??? (*) Dell Inspiron 500m ??? (*) +Dell Inspiron 510m ??? Dell Inspiron 600m ??? (*) Dell Inspiron 8200 ??? (*) Dell Inspiron 8500 ??? (*) @@ -123,6 +125,7 @@ Toshiba Satellite 4030CDT s3_mode (3) Toshiba Satellite 4080XCDT s3_mode (3) Toshiba Satellite 4090XCDT ??? (*) Toshiba Satellite P10-554 s3_bios,s3_mode (4)(****) +Toshiba M30 (2) xor X with nvidia driver using internal AGP Uniwill 244IIO ??? (*) diff --git a/Documentation/power/video_extension.txt b/Documentation/power/video_extension.txt index 8e33d7c8..b2f9b15 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/video_extension.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/video_extension.txt @@ -1,13 +1,16 @@ -This driver implement the ACPI Extensions For Display Adapters -for integrated graphics devices on motherboard, as specified in -ACPI 2.0 Specification, Appendix B, allowing to perform some basic -control like defining the video POST device, retrieving EDID information -or to setup a video output, etc. Note that this is an ref. implementation only. -It may or may not work for your integrated video device. +ACPI video extensions +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +This driver implement the ACPI Extensions For Display Adapters for +integrated graphics devices on motherboard, as specified in ACPI 2.0 +Specification, Appendix B, allowing to perform some basic control like +defining the video POST device, retrieving EDID information or to +setup a video output, etc. Note that this is an ref. implementation +only. It may or may not work for your integrated video device. Interfaces exposed to userland through /proc/acpi/video: -VGA/info : display the supported video bus device capability like ,Video ROM, CRT/LCD/TV. +VGA/info : display the supported video bus device capability like Video ROM, CRT/LCD/TV. VGA/ROM : Used to get a copy of the display devices' ROM data (up to 4k). VGA/POST_info : Used to determine what options are implemented. VGA/POST : Used to get/set POST device. @@ -15,7 +18,7 @@ VGA/DOS : Used to get/set ownership of output switching: Please refer ACPI spec B.4.1 _DOS VGA/CRT : CRT output VGA/LCD : LCD output -VGA/TV : TV output +VGA/TVO : TV output VGA/*/brightness : Used to get/set brightness of output device Notify event through /proc/acpi/event: diff --git a/Documentation/s390/CommonIO b/Documentation/s390/CommonIO index a831d9a..59d1166 100644 --- a/Documentation/s390/CommonIO +++ b/Documentation/s390/CommonIO @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ Command line parameters device numbers (0xabcd or abcd, for 2.4 backward compatibility). You can use the 'all' keyword to ignore all devices. The '!' operator will cause the I/O-layer to _not_ ignore a device. - The order on the command line is not important. + The command line is parsed from left to right. For example, cio_ignore=0.0.0023-0.0.0042,0.0.4711 @@ -72,13 +72,14 @@ Command line parameters /proc/cio_ignore; "add <device range>, <device range>, ..." will ignore the specified devices. - Note: Already known devices cannot be ignored. + Note: While already known devices can be added to the list of devices to be + ignored, there will be no effect on then. However, if such a device + disappears and then reappeares, it will then be ignored. - For example, if device 0.0.abcd is already known and all other devices - 0.0.a000-0.0.afff are not known, + For example, "echo add 0.0.a000-0.0.accc, 0.0.af00-0.0.afff > /proc/cio_ignore" - will add 0.0.a000-0.0.abcc, 0.0.abce-0.0.accc and 0.0.af00-0.0.afff to the - list of ignored devices and skip 0.0.abcd. + will add 0.0.a000-0.0.accc and 0.0.af00-0.0.afff to the list of ignored + devices. The devices can be specified either by bus id (0.0.abcd) or, for 2.4 backward compatibilty, by the device number in hexadecimal (0xabcd or abcd). @@ -98,7 +99,8 @@ Command line parameters - /proc/s390dbf/cio_trace/hex_ascii Logs the calling of functions in the common I/O-layer and, if applicable, - which subchannel they were called for. + which subchannel they were called for, as well as dumps of some data + structures (like irb in an error case). The level of logging can be changed to be more or less verbose by piping to /proc/s390dbf/cio_*/level a number between 0 and 6; see the documentation on diff --git a/Documentation/s390/s390dbf.txt b/Documentation/s390/s390dbf.txt index 2d1cd93..e24fdea 100644 --- a/Documentation/s390/s390dbf.txt +++ b/Documentation/s390/s390dbf.txt @@ -12,8 +12,8 @@ where log records can be stored efficiently in memory, where each component One purpose of this is to inspect the debug logs after a production system crash in order to analyze the reason for the crash. If the system still runs but only a subcomponent which uses dbf failes, -it is possible to look at the debug logs on a live system via the Linux proc -filesystem. +it is possible to look at the debug logs on a live system via the Linux +debugfs filesystem. The debug feature may also very useful for kernel and driver development. Design: @@ -52,16 +52,18 @@ Each debug entry contains the following data: - Flag, if entry is an exception or not The debug logs can be inspected in a live system through entries in -the proc-filesystem. Under the path /proc/s390dbf there is +the debugfs-filesystem. Under the toplevel directory "s390dbf" there is a directory for each registered component, which is named like the -corresponding component. +corresponding component. The debugfs normally should be mounted to +/sys/kernel/debug therefore the debug feature can be accessed unter +/sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf. The content of the directories are files which represent different views to the debug log. Each component can decide which views should be used through registering them with the function debug_register_view(). Predefined views for hex/ascii, sprintf and raw binary data are provided. It is also possible to define other views. The content of -a view can be inspected simply by reading the corresponding proc file. +a view can be inspected simply by reading the corresponding debugfs file. All debug logs have an an actual debug level (range from 0 to 6). The default level is 3. Event and Exception functions have a 'level' @@ -69,14 +71,14 @@ parameter. Only debug entries with a level that is lower or equal than the actual level are written to the log. This means, when writing events, high priority log entries should have a low level value whereas low priority entries should have a high one. -The actual debug level can be changed with the help of the proc-filesystem -through writing a number string "x" to the 'level' proc file which is +The actual debug level can be changed with the help of the debugfs-filesystem +through writing a number string "x" to the 'level' debugfs file which is provided for every debug log. Debugging can be switched off completely -by using "-" on the 'level' proc file. +by using "-" on the 'level' debugfs file. Example: -> echo "-" > /proc/s390dbf/dasd/level +> echo "-" > /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/dasd/level It is also possible to deactivate the debug feature globally for every debug log. You can change the behavior using 2 sysctl parameters in @@ -99,11 +101,11 @@ Kernel Interfaces: ------------------ ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- -debug_info_t *debug_register(char *name, int pages_index, int nr_areas, +debug_info_t *debug_register(char *name, int pages, int nr_areas, int buf_size); -Parameter: name: Name of debug log (e.g. used for proc entry) - pages_index: 2^pages_index pages will be allocated per area +Parameter: name: Name of debug log (e.g. used for debugfs entry) + pages: number of pages, which will be allocated per area nr_areas: number of debug areas buf_size: size of data area in each debug entry @@ -134,7 +136,7 @@ Return Value: none Description: Sets new actual debug level if new_level is valid. --------------------------------------------------------------------------- -+void debug_stop_all(void); +void debug_stop_all(void); Parameter: none @@ -270,7 +272,7 @@ Parameter: id: handle for debug log Return Value: 0 : ok < 0: Error -Description: registers new debug view and creates proc dir entry +Description: registers new debug view and creates debugfs dir entry --------------------------------------------------------------------------- int debug_unregister_view (debug_info_t * id, struct debug_view *view); @@ -281,7 +283,7 @@ Parameter: id: handle for debug log Return Value: 0 : ok < 0: Error -Description: unregisters debug view and removes proc dir entry +Description: unregisters debug view and removes debugfs dir entry @@ -308,7 +310,7 @@ static int init(void) { /* register 4 debug areas with one page each and 4 byte data field */ - debug_info = debug_register ("test", 0, 4, 4 ); + debug_info = debug_register ("test", 1, 4, 4 ); debug_register_view(debug_info,&debug_hex_ascii_view); debug_register_view(debug_info,&debug_raw_view); @@ -343,7 +345,7 @@ static int init(void) /* register 4 debug areas with one page each and data field for */ /* format string pointer + 2 varargs (= 3 * sizeof(long)) */ - debug_info = debug_register ("test", 0, 4, sizeof(long) * 3); + debug_info = debug_register ("test", 1, 4, sizeof(long) * 3); debug_register_view(debug_info,&debug_sprintf_view); debug_sprintf_event(debug_info, 2 , "first event in %s:%i\n",__FILE__,__LINE__); @@ -362,16 +364,16 @@ module_exit(cleanup); -ProcFS Interface +Debugfs Interface ---------------- Views to the debug logs can be investigated through reading the corresponding -proc-files: +debugfs-files: Example: -> ls /proc/s390dbf/dasd -flush hex_ascii level raw -> cat /proc/s390dbf/dasd/hex_ascii | sort +1 +> ls /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/dasd +flush hex_ascii level pages raw +> cat /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/dasd/hex_ascii | sort +1 00 00974733272:680099 2 - 02 0006ad7e 07 ea 4a 90 | .... 00 00974733272:682210 2 - 02 0006ade6 46 52 45 45 | FREE 00 00974733272:682213 2 - 02 0006adf6 07 ea 4a 90 | .... @@ -391,25 +393,36 @@ Changing the debug level Example: -> cat /proc/s390dbf/dasd/level +> cat /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/dasd/level 3 -> echo "5" > /proc/s390dbf/dasd/level -> cat /proc/s390dbf/dasd/level +> echo "5" > /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/dasd/level +> cat /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/dasd/level 5 Flushing debug areas -------------------- Debug areas can be flushed with piping the number of the desired -area (0...n) to the proc file "flush". When using "-" all debug areas +area (0...n) to the debugfs file "flush". When using "-" all debug areas are flushed. Examples: 1. Flush debug area 0: -> echo "0" > /proc/s390dbf/dasd/flush +> echo "0" > /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/dasd/flush 2. Flush all debug areas: -> echo "-" > /proc/s390dbf/dasd/flush +> echo "-" > /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/dasd/flush + +Changing the size of debug areas +------------------------------------ +It is possible the change the size of debug areas through piping +the number of pages to the debugfs file "pages". The resize request will +also flush the debug areas. + +Example: + +Define 4 pages for the debug areas of debug feature "dasd": +> echo "4" > /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/dasd/pages Stooping the debug feature -------------------------- @@ -491,7 +504,7 @@ Defining views -------------- Views are specified with the 'debug_view' structure. There are defined -callback functions which are used for reading and writing the proc files: +callback functions which are used for reading and writing the debugfs files: struct debug_view { char name[DEBUG_MAX_PROCF_LEN]; @@ -525,7 +538,7 @@ typedef int (debug_input_proc_t) (debug_info_t* id, The "private_data" member can be used as pointer to view specific data. It is not used by the debug feature itself. -The output when reading a debug-proc file is structured like this: +The output when reading a debugfs file is structured like this: "prolog_proc output" @@ -534,13 +547,13 @@ The output when reading a debug-proc file is structured like this: "header_proc output 3" "format_proc output 3" ... -When a view is read from the proc fs, the Debug Feature calls the +When a view is read from the debugfs, the Debug Feature calls the 'prolog_proc' once for writing the prolog. Then 'header_proc' and 'format_proc' are called for each existing debug entry. The input_proc can be used to implement functionality when it is written to -the view (e.g. like with 'echo "0" > /proc/s390dbf/dasd/level). +the view (e.g. like with 'echo "0" > /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/dasd/level). For header_proc there can be used the default function debug_dflt_header_fn() which is defined in in debug.h. @@ -602,7 +615,7 @@ debug_info = debug_register ("test", 0, 4, 4 )); debug_register_view(debug_info, &debug_test_view); for(i = 0; i < 10; i ++) debug_int_event(debug_info, 1, i); -> cat /proc/s390dbf/test/myview +> cat /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/test/myview 00 00964419734:611402 1 - 00 88042ca This error........... 00 00964419734:611405 1 - 00 88042ca That error........... 00 00964419734:611408 1 - 00 88042ca Problem.............. diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid index a9356c6..5331d91 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid +++ b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid @@ -1,3 +1,69 @@ +Release Date : Mon Mar 07 12:27:22 EST 2005 - Seokmann Ju <sju@lsil.com> +Current Version : 2.20.4.6 (scsi module), 2.20.2.6 (cmm module) +Older Version : 2.20.4.5 (scsi module), 2.20.2.5 (cmm module) + +1. Added IOCTL backward compatibility. + Convert megaraid_mm driver to new compat_ioctl entry points. + I don't have easy access to hardware, so only compile tested. + - Signed-off-by:Andi Kleen <ak@muc.de> + +2. megaraid_mbox fix: wrong order of arguments in memset() + That, BTW, shows why cross-builds are useful-the only indication of + problem had been a new warning showing up in sparse output on alpha + build (number of exceeding 256 got truncated). + - Signed-off-by: Al Viro + <viro@parcelfarce.linux.theplanet.co.uk> + +3. Convert pci_module_init to pci_register_driver + Convert from pci_module_init to pci_register_driver + (from:http://kerneljanitors.org/TODO) + - Signed-off-by: Domen Puncer <domen@coderock.org> + +4. Use the pre defined DMA mask constants from dma-mapping.h + Use the DMA_{64,32}BIT_MASK constants from dma-mapping.h when calling + pci_set_dma_mask() or pci_set_consistend_dma_mask(). See + http://marc.theaimsgroup.com/?t=108001993000001&r=1&w=2 for more + details. + Signed-off-by: Tobias Klauser <tklauser@nuerscht.ch> + Signed-off-by: Domen Puncer <domen@coderock.org> + +5. Remove SSID checking for Dobson, Lindsay, and Verde based products. + Checking the SSVID/SSID for controllers which have Dobson, Lindsay, + and Verde is unnecessary because device ID has been assigned by LSI + and it is unique value. So, all controllers with these IOPs have to be + supported by the driver regardless SSVID/SSID. + +6. Date Thu, 27 Jan 2005 04:31:09 +0100 + From Herbert Poetzl <> + Subject RFC: assert_spin_locked() for 2.6 + + Greetings! + + overcautious programming will kill your kernel ;) + ever thought about checking a spin_lock or even + asserting that it must be held (maybe just for + spinlock debugging?) ... + + there are several checks present in the kernel + where somebody does a variation on the following: + + BUG_ON(!spin_is_locked(&some_lock)); + + so what's wrong about that? nothing, unless you + compile the code with CONFIG_DEBUG_SPINLOCK but + without CONFIG_SMP ... in which case the BUG() + will kill your kernel ... + + maybe it's not advised to make such assertions, + but here is a solution which works for me ... + (compile tested for sh, x86_64 and x86, boot/run + tested for x86 only) + + best, + Herbert + + - Herbert Poetzl <herbert@13thfloor.at>, Thu, 27 Jan 2005 + Release Date : Thu Feb 03 12:27:22 EST 2005 - Seokmann Ju <sju@lsil.com> Current Version : 2.20.4.5 (scsi module), 2.20.2.5 (cmm module) Older Version : 2.20.4.4 (scsi module), 2.20.2.4 (cmm module) diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/scsi-changer.txt b/Documentation/scsi/scsi-changer.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c132687 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/scsi/scsi-changer.txt @@ -0,0 +1,180 @@ + +README for the SCSI media changer driver +======================================== + +This is a driver for SCSI Medium Changer devices, which are listed +with "Type: Medium Changer" in /proc/scsi/scsi. + +This is for *real* Jukeboxes. It is *not* supported to work with +common small CD-ROM changers, neither one-lun-per-slot SCSI changers +nor IDE drives. + +Userland tools available from here: + http://linux.bytesex.org/misc/changer.html + + +General Information +------------------- + +First some words about how changers work: A changer has 2 (possibly +more) SCSI ID's. One for the changer device which controls the robot, +and one for the device which actually reads and writes the data. The +later may be anything, a MOD, a CD-ROM, a tape or whatever. For the +changer device this is a "don't care", he *only* shuffles around the +media, nothing else. + + +The SCSI changer model is complex, compared to - for example - IDE-CD +changers. But it allows to handle nearly all possible cases. It knows +4 different types of changer elements: + + media transport - this one shuffles around the media, i.e. the + transport arm. Also known as "picker". + storage - a slot which can hold a media. + import/export - the same as above, but is accessable from outside, + i.e. there the operator (you !) can use this to + fill in and remove media from the changer. + Sometimes named "mailslot". + data transfer - this is the device which reads/writes, i.e. the + CD-ROM / Tape / whatever drive. + +None of these is limited to one: A huge Jukebox could have slots for +123 CD-ROM's, 5 CD-ROM readers (and therefore 6 SCSI ID's: the changer +and each CD-ROM) and 2 transport arms. No problem to handle. + + +How it is implemented +--------------------- + +I implemented the driver as character device driver with a NetBSD-like +ioctl interface. Just grabbed NetBSD's header file and one of the +other linux SCSI device drivers as starting point. The interface +should be source code compatible with NetBSD. So if there is any +software (anybody knows ???) which supports a BSDish changer driver, +it should work with this driver too. + +Over time a few more ioctls where added, volume tag support for example +wasn't covered by the NetBSD ioctl API. + + +Current State +------------- + +Support for more than one transport arm is not implemented yet (and +nobody asked for it so far...). + +I test and use the driver myself with a 35 slot cdrom jukebox from +Grundig. I got some reports telling it works ok with tape autoloaders +(Exabyte, HP and DEC). Some People use this driver with amanda. It +works fine with small (11 slots) and a huge (4 MOs, 88 slots) +magneto-optical Jukebox. Probably with lots of other changers too, most +(but not all :-) people mail me only if it does *not* work... + +I don't have any device lists, neither black-list nor white-list. Thus +it is quite useless to ask me whenever a specific device is supported or +not. In theory every changer device which supports the SCSI-2 media +changer command set should work out-of-the-box with this driver. If it +doesn't, it is a bug. Either within the driver or within the firmware +of the changer device. + + +Using it +-------- + +This is a character device with major number is 86, so use +"mknod /dev/sch0 c 86 0" to create the special file for the driver. + +If the module finds the changer, it prints some messages about the +device [ try "dmesg" if you don't see anything ] and should show up in +/proc/devices. If not.... some changers use ID ? / LUN 0 for the +device and ID ? / LUN 1 for the robot mechanism. But Linux does *not* +look for LUN's other than 0 as default, becauce there are to many +broken devices. So you can try: + + 1) echo "scsi add-single-device 0 0 ID 1" > /proc/scsi/scsi + (replace ID with the SCSI-ID of the device) + 2) boot the kernel with "max_scsi_luns=1" on the command line + (append="max_scsi_luns=1" in lilo.conf should do the trick) + + +Trouble? +-------- + +If you insmod the driver with "insmod debug=1", it will be verbose and +prints a lot of stuff to the syslog. Compiling the kernel with +CONFIG_SCSI_CONSTANTS=y improves the quality of the error messages alot +because the kernel will translate the error codes into human-readable +strings then. + +You can display these messages with the dmesg command (or check the +logfiles). If you email me some question becauce of a problem with the +driver, please include these messages. + + +Insmod options +-------------- + +debug=0/1 + Enable debug messages (see above, default: 0). + +verbose=0/1 + Be verbose (default: 1). + +init=0/1 + Send INITIALIZE ELEMENT STATUS command to the changer + at insmod time (default: 1). + +timeout_init=<seconds> + timeout for the INITIALIZE ELEMENT STATUS command + (default: 3600). + +timeout_move=<seconds> + timeout for all other commands (default: 120). + +dt_id=<id1>,<id2>,... +dt_lun=<lun1>,<lun2>,... + These two allow to specify the SCSI ID and LUN for the data + transfer elements. You likely don't need this as the jukebox + should provide this information. But some devices don't ... + +vendor_firsts= +vendor_counts= +vendor_labels= + These insmod options can be used to tell the driver that there + are some vendor-specific element types. Grundig for example + does this. Some jukeboxes have a printer to label fresh burned + CDs, which is addressed as element 0xc000 (type 5). To tell the + driver about this vendor-specific element, use this: + $ insmod ch \ + vendor_firsts=0xc000 \ + vendor_counts=1 \ + vendor_labels=printer + All three insmod options accept up to four comma-separated + values, this way you can configure the element types 5-8. + You likely need the SCSI specs for the device in question to + find the correct values as they are not covered by the SCSI-2 + standard. + + +Credits +------- + +I wrote this driver using the famous mailing-patches-around-the-world +method. With (more or less) help from: + + Daniel Moehwald <moehwald@hdg.de> + Dane Jasper <dane@sonic.net> + R. Scott Bailey <sbailey@dsddi.eds.com> + Jonathan Corbet <corbet@lwn.net> + +Special thanks go to + Martin Kuehne <martin.kuehne@bnbt.de> +for a old, second-hand (but full functional) cdrom jukebox which I use +to develop/test driver and tools now. + +Have fun, + + Gerd + +-- +Gerd Knorr <kraxel@bytesex.org> diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt index e41703d..da176c95d 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt @@ -936,8 +936,7 @@ Details: * * Returns SUCCESS if command aborted else FAILED * - * Locks: struct Scsi_Host::host_lock held (with irqsave) on entry - * and assumed to be held on return. + * Locks: None held * * Calling context: kernel thread * @@ -955,8 +954,7 @@ Details: * * Returns SUCCESS if command aborted else FAILED * - * Locks: struct Scsi_Host::host_lock held (with irqsave) on entry - * and assumed to be held on return. + * Locks: None held * * Calling context: kernel thread * @@ -974,8 +972,7 @@ Details: * * Returns SUCCESS if command aborted else FAILED * - * Locks: struct Scsi_Host::host_lock held (with irqsave) on entry - * and assumed to be held on return. + * Locks: None held * * Calling context: kernel thread * @@ -993,8 +990,7 @@ Details: * * Returns SUCCESS if command aborted else FAILED * - * Locks: struct Scsi_Host::host_lock held (with irqsave) on entry - * and assumed to be held on return. + * Locks: None held * * Calling context: kernel thread * diff --git a/Documentation/sgi-ioc4.txt b/Documentation/sgi-ioc4.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..876c96a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/sgi-ioc4.txt @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ +The SGI IOC4 PCI device is a bit of a strange beast, so some notes on +it are in order. + +First, even though the IOC4 performs multiple functions, such as an +IDE controller, a serial controller, a PS/2 keyboard/mouse controller, +and an external interrupt mechanism, it's not implemented as a +multifunction device. The consequence of this from a software +standpoint is that all these functions share a single IRQ, and +they can't all register to own the same PCI device ID. To make +matters a bit worse, some of the register blocks (and even registers +themselves) present in IOC4 are mixed-purpose between these several +functions, meaning that there's no clear "owning" device driver. + +The solution is to organize the IOC4 driver into several independent +drivers, "ioc4", "sgiioc4", and "ioc4_serial". Note that there is no +PS/2 controller driver as this functionality has never been wired up +on a shipping IO card. + +ioc4 +==== +This is the core (or shim) driver for IOC4. It is responsible for +initializing the basic functionality of the chip, and allocating +the PCI resources that are shared between the IOC4 functions. + +This driver also provides registration functions that the other +IOC4 drivers can call to make their presence known. Each driver +needs to provide a probe and remove function, which are invoked +by the core driver at appropriate times. The interface of these +IOC4 function probe and remove operations isn't precisely the same +as PCI device probe and remove operations, but is logically the +same operation. + +sgiioc4 +======= +This is the IDE driver for IOC4. Its name isn't very descriptive +simply for historical reasons (it used to be the only IOC4 driver +component). There's not much to say about it other than it hooks +up to the ioc4 driver via the appropriate registration, probe, and +remove functions. + +ioc4_serial +=========== +This is the serial driver for IOC4. There's not much to say about it +other than it hooks up to the ioc4 driver via the appropriate registration, +probe, and remove functions. diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt index 71ef049..104a994 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt @@ -615,9 +615,11 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. Module snd-hda-intel -------------------- - Module for Intel HD Audio (ICH6, ICH6M, ICH7) + Module for Intel HD Audio (ICH6, ICH6M, ICH7), ATI SB450, + VIA VT8251/VT8237A model - force the model name + position_fix - Fix DMA pointer (0 = FIFO size, 1 = none, 2 = POSBUF) Module supports up to 8 cards. @@ -635,6 +637,10 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. 5stack 5-jack in back, 2-jack in front 5stack-digout 5-jack in back, 2-jack in front, a SPDIF out w810 3-jack + z71v 3-jack (HP shared SPDIF) + asus 3-jack + uniwill 3-jack + F1734 2-jack CMI9880 minimal 3-jack in back @@ -642,6 +648,15 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. full 6-jack in back, 2-jack in front full_dig 6-jack in back, 2-jack in front, SPDIF I/O allout 5-jack in back, 2-jack in front, SPDIF out + auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) + + Note 2: If you get click noises on output, try the module option + position_fix=1 or 2. position_fix=1 will use the SD_LPIB + register value without FIFO size correction as the current + DMA pointer. position_fix=2 will make the driver to use + the position buffer instead of reading SD_LPIB register. + (Usually SD_LPLIB register is more accurate than the + position buffer.) Module snd-hdsp --------------- @@ -660,7 +675,19 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. module did formerly. It will allocate the buffers in advance when any HDSP cards are found. To make the buffer allocation sure, load snd-page-alloc module in the early - stage of boot sequence. + stage of boot sequence. See "Early Buffer Allocation" + section. + + Module snd-hdspm + ---------------- + + Module for RME HDSP MADI board. + + precise_ptr - Enable precise pointer, or disable. + line_outs_monitor - Send playback streams to analog outs by default. + enable_monitor - Enable Analog Out on Channel 63/64 by default. + + See hdspm.txt for details. Module snd-ice1712 ------------------ @@ -677,15 +704,19 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. * TerraTec EWS 88D * TerraTec EWX 24/96 * TerraTec DMX 6Fire + * TerraTec Phase 88 * Hoontech SoundTrack DSP 24 * Hoontech SoundTrack DSP 24 Value * Hoontech SoundTrack DSP 24 Media 7.1 + * Event Electronics, EZ8 * Digigram VX442 + * Lionstracs, Mediastaton model - Use the given board model, one of the following: delta1010, dio2496, delta66, delta44, audiophile, delta410, delta1010lt, vx442, ewx2496, ews88mt, ews88mt_new, ews88d, - dmx6fire, dsp24, dsp24_value, dsp24_71, ez8 + dmx6fire, dsp24, dsp24_value, dsp24_71, ez8, + phase88, mediastation omni - Omni I/O support for MidiMan M-Audio Delta44/66 cs8427_timeout - reset timeout for the CS8427 chip (S/PDIF transciever) in msec resolution, default value is 500 (0.5 sec) @@ -694,20 +725,46 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. is not used with all Envy24 based cards (for example in the MidiMan Delta serie). + Note: The supported board is detected by reading EEPROM or PCI + SSID (if EEPROM isn't available). You can override the + model by passing "model" module option in case that the + driver isn't configured properly or you want to try another + type for testing. + Module snd-ice1724 ------------------ - Module for Envy24HT (VT/ICE1724) based PCI sound cards. + Module for Envy24HT (VT/ICE1724), Envy24PT (VT1720) based PCI sound cards. * MidiMan M Audio Revolution 7.1 * AMP Ltd AUDIO2000 - * TerraTec Aureon Sky-5.1, Space-7.1 + * TerraTec Aureon 5.1 Sky + * TerraTec Aureon 7.1 Space + * TerraTec Aureon 7.1 Universe + * TerraTec Phase 22 + * TerraTec Phase 28 + * AudioTrak Prodigy 7.1 + * AudioTrak Prodigy 192 + * Pontis MS300 + * Albatron K8X800 Pro II + * Chaintech ZNF3-150 + * Chaintech ZNF3-250 + * Chaintech 9CJS + * Chaintech AV-710 + * Shuttle SN25P model - Use the given board model, one of the following: - revo71, amp2000, prodigy71, aureon51, aureon71, - k8x800 + revo71, amp2000, prodigy71, prodigy192, aureon51, + aureon71, universe, k8x800, phase22, phase28, ms300, + av710 Module supports up to 8 cards and autoprobe. + Note: The supported board is detected by reading EEPROM or PCI + SSID (if EEPROM isn't available). You can override the + model by passing "model" module option in case that the + driver isn't configured properly or you want to try another + type for testing. + Module snd-intel8x0 ------------------- @@ -1026,7 +1083,8 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. module did formerly. It will allocate the buffers in advance when any RME9652 cards are found. To make the buffer allocation sure, load snd-page-alloc module in the early - stage of boot sequence. + stage of boot sequence. See "Early Buffer Allocation" + section. Module snd-sa11xx-uda1341 (on arm only) --------------------------------------- @@ -1211,16 +1269,18 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. ------------------ Module for AC'97 motherboards based on VIA 82C686A/686B, 8233, - 8233A, 8233C, 8235 (south) bridge. + 8233A, 8233C, 8235, 8237 (south) bridge. mpu_port - 0x300,0x310,0x320,0x330, otherwise obtain BIOS setup [VIA686A/686B only] joystick - Enable joystick (default off) [VIA686A/686B only] ac97_clock - AC'97 codec clock base (default 48000Hz) dxs_support - support DXS channels, - 0 = auto (defalut), 1 = enable, 2 = disable, - 3 = 48k only, 4 = no VRA - [VIA8233/C,8235 only] + 0 = auto (default), 1 = enable, 2 = disable, + 3 = 48k only, 4 = no VRA, 5 = enable any sample + rate and different sample rates on different + channels + [VIA8233/C, 8235, 8237 only] ac97_quirk - AC'97 workaround for strange hardware See the description of intel8x0 module for details. @@ -1232,18 +1292,23 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. default value 1.4. Then the interrupt number will be assigned under 15. You might also upgrade your BIOS. - Note: VIA8233/5 (not VIA8233A) can support DXS (direct sound) + Note: VIA8233/5/7 (not VIA8233A) can support DXS (direct sound) channels as the first PCM. On these channels, up to 4 - streams can be played at the same time. + streams can be played at the same time, and the controller + can perform sample rate conversion with separate rates for + each channel. As default (dxs_support = 0), 48k fixed rate is chosen except for the known devices since the output is often noisy except for 48k on some mother boards due to the bug of BIOS. - Please try once dxs_support=1 and if it works on other + Please try once dxs_support=5 and if it works on other sample rates (e.g. 44.1kHz of mp3 playback), please let us know the PCI subsystem vendor/device id's (output of "lspci -nv"). - If it doesn't work, try dxs_support=4. If it still doesn't + If dxs_support=5 does not work, try dxs_support=4; if it + doesn't work too, try dxs_support=1. (dxs_support=1 is + usually for old motherboards. The correct implementated + board should work with 4 or 5.) If it still doesn't work and the default setting is ok, dxs_support=3 is the right choice. If the default setting doesn't work at all, try dxs_support=2 to disable the DXS channels. @@ -1497,6 +1562,36 @@ Proc interfaces (/proc/asound) echo "rvplayer 0 0 block" > /proc/asound/card0/pcm0p/oss +Early Buffer Allocation +======================= + +Some drivers (e.g. hdsp) require the large contiguous buffers, and +sometimes it's too late to find such spaces when the driver module is +actually loaded due to memory fragmentation. You can pre-allocate the +PCM buffers by loading snd-page-alloc module and write commands to its +proc file in prior, for example, in the early boot stage like +/etc/init.d/*.local scripts. + +Reading the proc file /proc/drivers/snd-page-alloc shows the current +usage of page allocation. In writing, you can send the following +commands to the snd-page-alloc driver: + + - add VENDOR DEVICE MASK SIZE BUFFERS + + VENDOR and DEVICE are PCI vendor and device IDs. They take + integer numbers (0x prefix is needed for the hex). + MASK is the PCI DMA mask. Pass 0 if not restricted. + SIZE is the size of each buffer to allocate. You can pass + k and m suffix for KB and MB. The max number is 16MB. + BUFFERS is the number of buffers to allocate. It must be greater + than 0. The max number is 4. + + - erase + + This will erase the all pre-allocated buffers which are not in + use. + + Links ===== diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/CMIPCI.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/CMIPCI.txt index 4a7df77..1872e244 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/CMIPCI.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/CMIPCI.txt @@ -89,19 +89,22 @@ and use the interleaved 4 channel data. There are some control switchs affecting to the speaker connections: -"Line-In As Rear" - As mentioned above, the line-in jack is used - for the rear (3th and 4th channels) output. -"Line-In As Bass" - The line-in jack is used for the bass (5th - and 6th channels) output. -"Mic As Center/LFE" - The mic jack is used for the bass output. - If this switch is on, you cannot use a microphone as a capture - source, of course. - +"Line-In Mode" - an enum control to change the behavior of line-in + jack. Either "Line-In", "Rear Output" or "Bass Output" can + be selected. The last item is available only with model 039 + or newer. + When "Rear Output" is chosen, the surround channels 3 and 4 + are output to line-in jack. +"Mic-In Mode" - an enum control to change the behavior of mic-in + jack. Either "Mic-In" or "Center/LFE Output" can be + selected. + When "Center/LFE Output" is chosen, the center and bass + channels (channels 5 and 6) are output to mic-in jack. Digital I/O ----------- -The CM8x38 provides the excellent SPDIF capability with very chip +The CM8x38 provides the excellent SPDIF capability with very cheap price (yes, that's the reason I bought the card :) The SPDIF playback and capture are done via the third PCM device @@ -122,8 +125,9 @@ respectively, so you cannot playback both analog and digital streams simultaneously. To enable SPDIF output, you need to turn on "IEC958 Output Switch" -control via mixer or alsactl. Then you'll see the red light on from -the card so you know that's working obviously :) +control via mixer or alsactl ("IEC958" is the official name of +so-called S/PDIF). Then you'll see the red light on from the card so +you know that's working obviously :) The SPDIF input is always enabled, so you can hear SPDIF input data from line-out with "IEC958 In Monitor" switch at any time (see below). @@ -205,9 +209,10 @@ In addition to the standard SB mixer, CM8x38 provides more functions. MIDI CONTROLLER --------------- -The MPU401-UART interface is enabled as default only for the first -(CMIPCI) card. You need to set module option "midi_port" properly -for the 2nd (CMIPCI) card. +The MPU401-UART interface is disabled as default. You need to set +module option "mpu_port" with a valid I/O port address to enable the +MIDI support. The valid I/O ports are 0x300, 0x310, 0x320 and 0x330. +Choose the value which doesn't conflict with other cards. There is _no_ hardware wavetable function on this chip (except for OPL3 synth below). @@ -229,9 +234,11 @@ I don't know why.. Joystick and Modem ------------------ -The joystick and modem should be available by enabling the control -switch "Joystick" and "Modem" respectively. But I myself have never -tested them yet. +The legacy joystick is supported. To enable the joystick support, pass +joystick_port=1 module option. The value 1 means the auto-detection. +If the auto-detection fails, try to pass the exact I/O address. + +The modem is enabled dynamically via a card control switch "Modem". Debugging Information diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl b/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl index e789475..db0b7d2 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl @@ -371,7 +371,7 @@ <listitem><para>create <function>probe()</function> callback.</para></listitem> <listitem><para>create <function>remove()</function> callback.</para></listitem> <listitem><para>create pci_driver table which contains the three pointers above.</para></listitem> - <listitem><para>create <function>init()</function> function just calling <function>pci_module_init()</function> to register the pci_driver table defined above.</para></listitem> + <listitem><para>create <function>init()</function> function just calling <function>pci_register_driver()</function> to register the pci_driver table defined above.</para></listitem> <listitem><para>create <function>exit()</function> function to call <function>pci_unregister_driver()</function> function.</para></listitem> </itemizedlist> </para> @@ -1198,7 +1198,7 @@ /* initialization of the module */ static int __init alsa_card_mychip_init(void) { - return pci_module_init(&driver); + return pci_register_driver(&driver); } /* clean up the module */ @@ -1654,7 +1654,7 @@ <![CDATA[ static int __init alsa_card_mychip_init(void) { - return pci_module_init(&driver); + return pci_register_driver(&driver); } static void __exit alsa_card_mychip_exit(void) diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/emu10k1-jack.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/emu10k1-jack.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..751d450 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/emu10k1-jack.txt @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ +This document is a guide to using the emu10k1 based devices with JACK for low +latency, multichannel recording functionality. All of my recent work to allow +Linux users to use the full capabilities of their hardware has been inspired +by the kX Project. Without their work I never would have discovered the true +power of this hardware. + + http://www.kxproject.com + - Lee Revell, 2005.03.30 + +Low latency, multichannel audio with JACK and the emu10k1/emu10k2 +----------------------------------------------------------------- + +Until recently, emu10k1 users on Linux did not have access to the same low +latency, multichannel features offered by the "kX ASIO" feature of their +Windows driver. As of ALSA 1.0.9 this is no more! + +For those unfamiliar with kX ASIO, this consists of 16 capture and 16 playback +channels. With a post 2.6.9 Linux kernel, latencies down to 64 (1.33 ms) or +even 32 (0.66ms) frames should work well. + +The configuration is slightly more involved than on Windows, as you have to +select the correct device for JACK to use. Actually, for qjackctl users it's +fairly self explanatory - select Duplex, then for capture and playback select +the multichannel devices, set the in and out channels to 16, and the sample +rate to 48000Hz. The command line looks like this: + +/usr/local/bin/jackd -R -dalsa -r48000 -p64 -n2 -D -Chw:0,2 -Phw:0,3 -S + +This will give you 16 input ports and 16 output ports. + +The 16 output ports map onto the 16 FX buses (or the first 16 of 64, for the +Audigy). The mapping from FX bus to physical output is described in +SB-Live-mixer.txt (or Audigy-mixer.txt). + +The 16 input ports are connected to the 16 physical inputs. Contrary to +popular belief, all emu10k1 cards are multichannel cards. Which of these +input channels have physical inputs connected to them depends on the card +model. Trial and error is highly recommended; the pinout diagrams +for the card have been reverse engineered by some enterprising kX users and are +available on the internet. Meterbridge is helpful here, and the kX forums are +packed with useful information. + +Each input port will either correspond to a digital (SPDIF) input, an analog +input, or nothing. The one exception is the SBLive! 5.1. On these devices, +the second and third input ports are wired to the center/LFE output. You will +still see 16 capture channels, but only 14 are available for recording inputs. + +This chart, borrowed from kxfxlib/da_asio51.cpp, describes the mapping of JACK +ports to FXBUS2 (multitrack recording input) and EXTOUT (physical output) +channels. + +/*JACK (& ASIO) mappings on 10k1 5.1 SBLive cards: +-------------------------------------------- +JACK Epilog FXBUS2(nr) +-------------------------------------------- +capture_1 asio14 FXBUS2(0xe) +capture_2 asio15 FXBUS2(0xf) +capture_3 asio0 FXBUS2(0x0) +~capture_4 Center EXTOUT(0x11) // mapped to by Center +~capture_5 LFE EXTOUT(0x12) // mapped to by LFE +capture_6 asio3 FXBUS2(0x3) +capture_7 asio4 FXBUS2(0x4) +capture_8 asio5 FXBUS2(0x5) +capture_9 asio6 FXBUS2(0x6) +capture_10 asio7 FXBUS2(0x7) +capture_11 asio8 FXBUS2(0x8) +capture_12 asio9 FXBUS2(0x9) +capture_13 asio10 FXBUS2(0xa) +capture_14 asio11 FXBUS2(0xb) +capture_15 asio12 FXBUS2(0xc) +capture_16 asio13 FXBUS2(0xd) +*/ + +TODO: describe use of ld10k1/qlo10k1 in conjunction with JACK diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/hdspm.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/hdspm.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7a67ff7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/hdspm.txt @@ -0,0 +1,362 @@ +Software Interface ALSA-DSP MADI Driver + +(translated from German, so no good English ;-), +2004 - winfried ritsch + + + + Full functionality has been added to the driver. Since some of + the Controls and startup-options are ALSA-Standard and only the + special Controls are described and discussed below. + + + hardware functionality: + + + Audio transmission: + + number of channels -- depends on transmission mode + + The number of channels chosen is from 1..Nmax. The reason to + use for a lower number of channels is only resource allocation, + since unused DMA channels are disabled and less memory is + allocated. So also the throughput of the PCI system can be + scaled. (Only important for low performance boards). + + Single Speed -- 1..64 channels + + (Note: Choosing the 56channel mode for transmission or as + receiver, only 56 are transmitted/received over the MADI, but + all 64 channels are available for the mixer, so channel count + for the driver) + + Double Speed -- 1..32 channels + + Note: Choosing the 56-channel mode for + transmission/receive-mode , only 28 are transmitted/received + over the MADI, but all 32 channels are available for the mixer, + so channel count for the driver + + + Quad Speed -- 1..16 channels + + Note: Choosing the 56-channel mode for + transmission/receive-mode , only 14 are transmitted/received + over the MADI, but all 16 channels are available for the mixer, + so channel count for the driver + + Format -- signed 32 Bit Little Endian (SNDRV_PCM_FMTBIT_S32_LE) + + Sample Rates -- + + Single Speed -- 32000, 44100, 48000 + + Double Speed -- 64000, 88200, 96000 (untested) + + Quad Speed -- 128000, 176400, 192000 (untested) + + access-mode -- MMAP (memory mapped), Not interleaved + (PCM_NON-INTERLEAVED) + + buffer-sizes -- 64,128,256,512,1024,2048,8192 Samples + + fragments -- 2 + + Hardware-pointer -- 2 Modi + + + The Card supports the readout of the actual Buffer-pointer, + where DMA reads/writes. Since of the bulk mode of PCI it is only + 64 Byte accurate. SO it is not really usable for the + ALSA-mid-level functions (here the buffer-ID gives a better + result), but if MMAP is used by the application. Therefore it + can be configured at load-time with the parameter + precise-pointer. + + + (Hint: Experimenting I found that the pointer is maximum 64 to + large never to small. So if you subtract 64 you always have a + safe pointer for writing, which is used on this mode inside + ALSA. In theory now you can get now a latency as low as 16 + Samples, which is a quarter of the interrupt possibilities.) + + Precise Pointer -- off + interrupt used for pointer-calculation + + Precise Pointer -- on + hardware pointer used. + + Controller: + + + Since DSP-MADI-Mixer has 8152 Fader, it does not make sense to + use the standard mixer-controls, since this would break most of + (especially graphic) ALSA-Mixer GUIs. So Mixer control has be + provided by a 2-dimensional controller using the + hwdep-interface. + + Also all 128+256 Peak and RMS-Meter can be accessed via the + hwdep-interface. Since it could be a performance problem always + copying and converting Peak and RMS-Levels even if you just need + one, I decided to export the hardware structure, so that of + needed some driver-guru can implement a memory-mapping of mixer + or peak-meters over ioctl, or also to do only copying and no + conversion. A test-application shows the usage of the controller. + + Latency Controls --- not implemented !!! + + + Note: Within the windows-driver the latency is accessible of a + control-panel, but buffer-sizes are controlled with ALSA from + hwparams-calls and should not be changed in run-state, I did not + implement it here. + + + System Clock -- suspended !!!! + + Name -- "System Clock Mode" + + Access -- Read Write + + Values -- "Master" "Slave" + + + !!!! This is a hardware-function but is in conflict with the + Clock-source controller, which is a kind of ALSA-standard. I + makes sense to set the card to a special mode (master at some + frequency or slave), since even not using an Audio-application + a studio should have working synchronisations setup. So use + Clock-source-controller instead !!!! + + Clock Source + + Name -- "Sample Clock Source" + + Access -- Read Write + + Values -- "AutoSync", "Internal 32.0 kHz", "Internal 44.1 kHz", + "Internal 48.0 kHz", "Internal 64.0 kHz", "Internal 88.2 kHz", + "Internal 96.0 kHz" + + Choose between Master at a specific Frequency and so also the + Speed-mode or Slave (Autosync). Also see "Preferred Sync Ref" + + + !!!! This is no pure hardware function but was implemented by + ALSA by some ALSA-drivers before, so I use it also. !!! + + + Preferred Sync Ref + + Name -- "Preferred Sync Reference" + + Access -- Read Write + + Values -- "Word" "MADI" + + + Within the Auto-sync-Mode the preferred Sync Source can be + chosen. If it is not available another is used if possible. + + Note: Since MADI has a much higher bit-rate than word-clock, the + card should synchronise better in MADI Mode. But since the + RME-PLL is very good, there are almost no problems with + word-clock too. I never found a difference. + + + TX 64 channel --- + + Name -- "TX 64 channels mode" + + Access -- Read Write + + Values -- 0 1 + + Using 64-channel-modus (1) or 56-channel-modus for + MADI-transmission (0). + + + Note: This control is for output only. Input-mode is detected + automatically from hardware sending MADI. + + + Clear TMS --- + + Name -- "Clear Track Marker" + + Access -- Read Write + + Values -- 0 1 + + + Don't use to lower 5 Audio-bits on AES as additional Bits. + + + Safe Mode oder Auto Input --- + + Name -- "Safe Mode" + + Access -- Read Write + + Values -- 0 1 + + (default on) + + If on (1), then if either the optical or coaxial connection + has a failure, there is a takeover to the working one, with no + sample failure. Its only useful if you use the second as a + backup connection. + + Input --- + + Name -- "Input Select" + + Access -- Read Write + + Values -- optical coaxial + + + Choosing the Input, optical or coaxial. If Safe-mode is active, + this is the preferred Input. + +-------------- Mixer ---------------------- + + Mixer + + Name -- "Mixer" + + Access -- Read Write + + Values - <channel-number 0-127> <Value 0-65535> + + + Here as a first value the channel-index is taken to get/set the + corresponding mixer channel, where 0-63 are the input to output + fader and 64-127 the playback to outputs fader. Value 0 + is channel muted 0 and 32768 an amplification of 1. + + Chn 1-64 + + fast mixer for the ALSA-mixer utils. The diagonal of the + mixer-matrix is implemented from playback to output. + + + Line Out + + Name -- "Line Out" + + Access -- Read Write + + Values -- 0 1 + + Switching on and off the analog out, which has nothing to do + with mixing or routing. the analog outs reflects channel 63,64. + + +--- information (only read access): + + Sample Rate + + Name -- "System Sample Rate" + + Access -- Read-only + + getting the sample rate. + + + External Rate measured + + Name -- "External Rate" + + Access -- Read only + + + Should be "Autosync Rate", but Name used is + ALSA-Scheme. External Sample frequency liked used on Autosync is + reported. + + + MADI Sync Status + + Name -- "MADI Sync Lock Status" + + Access -- Read + + Values -- 0,1,2 + + MADI-Input is 0=Unlocked, 1=Locked, or 2=Synced. + + + Word Clock Sync Status + + Name -- "Word Clock Lock Status" + + Access -- Read + + Values -- 0,1,2 + + Word Clock Input is 0=Unlocked, 1=Locked, or 2=Synced. + + AutoSync + + Name -- "AutoSync Reference" + + Access -- Read + + Values -- "WordClock", "MADI", "None" + + Sync-Reference is either "WordClock", "MADI" or none. + + RX 64ch --- noch nicht implementiert + + MADI-Receiver is in 64 channel mode oder 56 channel mode. + + + AB_inp --- not tested + + Used input for Auto-Input. + + + actual Buffer Position --- not implemented + + !!! this is a ALSA internal function, so no control is used !!! + + + +Calling Parameter: + + index int array (min = 1, max = 8), + "Index value for RME HDSPM interface." card-index within ALSA + + note: ALSA-standard + + id string array (min = 1, max = 8), + "ID string for RME HDSPM interface." + + note: ALSA-standard + + enable int array (min = 1, max = 8), + "Enable/disable specific HDSPM sound-cards." + + note: ALSA-standard + + precise_ptr int array (min = 1, max = 8), + "Enable precise pointer, or disable." + + note: Use only when the application supports this (which is a special case). + + line_outs_monitor int array (min = 1, max = 8), + "Send playback streams to analog outs by default." + + + note: each playback channel is mixed to the same numbered output + channel (routed). This is against the ALSA-convention, where all + channels have to be muted on after loading the driver, but was + used before on other cards, so i historically use it again) + + + + enable_monitor int array (min = 1, max = 8), + "Enable Analog Out on Channel 63/64 by default." + + note: here the analog output is enabled (but not routed).
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt index 3515917..9f11d36 100644 --- a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt +++ b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt @@ -49,6 +49,7 @@ show up in /proc/sys/kernel: - shmmax [ sysv ipc ] - shmmni - stop-a [ SPARC only ] +- suid_dumpable - sysrq ==> Documentation/sysrq.txt - tainted - threads-max @@ -300,6 +301,25 @@ kernel. This value defaults to SHMMAX. ============================================================== +suid_dumpable: + +This value can be used to query and set the core dump mode for setuid +or otherwise protected/tainted binaries. The modes are + +0 - (default) - traditional behaviour. Any process which has changed + privilege levels or is execute only will not be dumped +1 - (debug) - all processes dump core when possible. The core dump is + owned by the current user and no security is applied. This is + intended for system debugging situations only. Ptrace is unchecked. +2 - (suidsafe) - any binary which normally would not be dumped is dumped + readable by root only. This allows the end user to remove + such a dump but not access it directly. For security reasons + core dumps in this mode will not overwrite one another or + other files. This mode is appropriate when adminstrators are + attempting to debug problems in a normal environment. + +============================================================== + tainted: Non-zero if the kernel has been tainted. Numeric values, which diff --git a/Documentation/sysrq.txt b/Documentation/sysrq.txt index f98c2e3..136d817 100644 --- a/Documentation/sysrq.txt +++ b/Documentation/sysrq.txt @@ -72,6 +72,8 @@ On all - write a character to /proc/sysrq-trigger. eg: 'b' - Will immediately reboot the system without syncing or unmounting your disks. +'c' - Will perform a kexec reboot in order to take a crashdump. + 'o' - Will shut your system off (if configured and supported). 's' - Will attempt to sync all mounted filesystems. @@ -122,6 +124,9 @@ useful when you want to exit a program that will not let you switch consoles. re'B'oot is good when you're unable to shut down. But you should also 'S'ync and 'U'mount first. +'C'rashdump can be used to manually trigger a crashdump when the system is hung. +The kernel needs to have been built with CONFIG_KEXEC enabled. + 'S'ync is great when your system is locked up, it allows you to sync your disks and will certainly lessen the chance of data loss and fscking. Note that the sync hasn't taken place until you see the "OK" and "Done" appear diff --git a/Documentation/tty.txt b/Documentation/tty.txt index 3958cf7..8ff7bc2 100644 --- a/Documentation/tty.txt +++ b/Documentation/tty.txt @@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ copy of the structure. You must not re-register over the top of the line discipline even with the same data or your computer again will be eaten by demons. -In order to remove a line discipline call tty_register_ldisc passing NULL. +In order to remove a line discipline call tty_unregister_ldisc(). In ancient times this always worked. In modern times the function will return -EBUSY if the ldisc is currently in use. Since the ldisc referencing code manages the module counts this should not usually be a concern. diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.bttv b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.bttv index e46761c..aeeafec 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.bttv +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.bttv @@ -119,3 +119,17 @@ card=117 - NGS NGSTV+ card=118 - LMLBT4 card=119 - Tekram M205 PRO card=120 - Conceptronic CONTVFMi +card=121 - Euresys Picolo Tetra +card=122 - Spirit TV Tuner +card=123 - AVerMedia AVerTV DVB-T 771 +card=124 - AverMedia AverTV DVB-T 761 +card=125 - MATRIX Vision Sigma-SQ +card=126 - MATRIX Vision Sigma-SLC +card=127 - APAC Viewcomp 878(AMAX) +card=128 - DVICO FusionHDTV DVB-T Lite +card=129 - V-Gear MyVCD +card=130 - Super TV Tuner +card=131 - Tibet Systems 'Progress DVR' CS16 +card=132 - Kodicom 4400R (master) +card=133 - Kodicom 4400R (slave) +card=134 - Adlink RTV24 diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 new file mode 100644 index 0000000..216f705 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ +card=0 - UNKNOWN/GENERIC +card=1 - Hauppauge WinTV 34xxx models +card=2 - GDI Black Gold +card=3 - PixelView +card=4 - ATI TV Wonder Pro +card=5 - Leadtek Winfast 2000XP Expert +card=6 - AverTV Studio 303 (M126) +card=7 - MSI TV-@nywhere Master +card=8 - Leadtek Winfast DV2000 +card=9 - Leadtek PVR 2000 +card=10 - IODATA GV-VCP3/PCI +card=11 - Prolink PlayTV PVR +card=12 - ASUS PVR-416 +card=13 - MSI TV-@nywhere +card=14 - KWorld/VStream XPert DVB-T +card=15 - DVICO FusionHDTV DVB-T1 +card=16 - KWorld LTV883RF +card=17 - DViCO - FusionHDTV 3 Gold +card=18 - Hauppauge Nova-T DVB-T +card=19 - Conexant DVB-T reference design +card=20 - Provideo PV259 +card=21 - DVICO FusionHDTV DVB-T Plus +card=22 - digitalnow DNTV Live! DVB-T +card=23 - pcHDTV HD3000 HDTV +card=24 - Hauppauge WinTV 28xxx (Roslyn) models +card=25 - Digital-Logic MICROSPACE Entertainment Center (MEC) +card=26 - IODATA GV/BCTV7E +card=27 - PixelView PlayTV Ultra Pro (Stereo) +card=28 - DViCO - FusionHDTV 3 Gold-T diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 index a6c82fa..d5ed95d 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 @@ -20,16 +20,37 @@ 19 -> Compro VideoMate TV [185b:c100] 20 -> Matrox CronosPlus [102B:48d0] 21 -> 10MOONS PCI TV CAPTURE CARD [1131:2001] - 22 -> Medion 2819/ AverMedia M156 [1461:a70b,1461:2115] + 22 -> AverMedia M156 / Medion 2819 [1461:a70b] 23 -> BMK MPEX Tuner 24 -> KNC One TV-Station DVR [1894:a006] 25 -> ASUS TV-FM 7133 [1043:4843] 26 -> Pinnacle PCTV Stereo (saa7134) [11bd:002b] - 27 -> Manli MuchTV M-TV002 - 28 -> Manli MuchTV M-TV001 + 27 -> Manli MuchTV M-TV002/Behold TV 403 FM + 28 -> Manli MuchTV M-TV001/Behold TV 401 29 -> Nagase Sangyo TransGear 3000TV [1461:050c] 30 -> Elitegroup ECS TVP3XP FM1216 Tuner Card(PAL-BG,FM) [1019:4cb4] 31 -> Elitegroup ECS TVP3XP FM1236 Tuner Card (NTSC,FM) [1019:4cb5] 32 -> AVACS SmartTV 33 -> AVerMedia DVD EZMaker [1461:10ff] - 34 -> LifeView FlyTV Platinum33 mini [5168:0212] + 34 -> Noval Prime TV 7133 + 35 -> AverMedia AverTV Studio 305 [1461:2115] + 37 -> Items MuchTV Plus / IT-005 + 38 -> Terratec Cinergy 200 TV [153B:1152] + 39 -> LifeView FlyTV Platinum Mini [5168:0212] + 40 -> Compro VideoMate TV PVR/FM [185b:c100] + 41 -> Compro VideoMate TV Gold+ [185b:c100] + 42 -> Sabrent SBT-TVFM (saa7130) + 43 -> :Zolid Xpert TV7134 + 44 -> Empire PCI TV-Radio LE + 45 -> Avermedia AVerTV Studio 307 [1461:9715] + 46 -> AVerMedia Cardbus TV/Radio [1461:d6ee] + 47 -> Terratec Cinergy 400 mobile [153b:1162] + 48 -> Terratec Cinergy 600 TV MK3 [153B:1158] + 49 -> Compro VideoMate Gold+ Pal [185b:c200] + 50 -> Pinnacle PCTV 300i DVB-T + PAL [11bd:002d] + 51 -> ProVideo PV952 [1540:9524] + 52 -> AverMedia AverTV/305 [1461:2108] + 54 -> LifeView FlyTV Platinum FM [5168:0214,1489:0214] + 55 -> LifeView FlyDVB-T DUO [5168:0306] + 56 -> Avermedia AVerTV 307 [1461:a70a] + 57 -> Avermedia AVerTV GO 007 FM [1461:f31f] diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tuner b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tuner index f7bafe8..aeb8df8 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tuner +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tuner @@ -44,3 +44,18 @@ tuner=42 - Philips 1236D ATSC/NTSC daul in tuner=43 - Philips NTSC MK3 (FM1236MK3 or FM1236/F) tuner=44 - Philips 4 in 1 (ATI TV Wonder Pro/Conexant) tuner=45 - Microtune 4049 FM5 +tuner=46 - Panasonic VP27s/ENGE4324D +tuner=47 - LG NTSC (TAPE series) +tuner=48 - Tenna TNF 8831 BGFF) +tuner=49 - Microtune 4042 FI5 ATSC/NTSC dual in +tuner=50 - TCL 2002N +tuner=51 - Philips PAL/SECAM_D (FM 1256 I-H3) +tuner=52 - Thomson DDT 7610 (ATSC/NTSC) +tuner=53 - Philips FQ1286 +tuner=54 - tda8290+75 +tuner=55 - LG PAL (TAPE series) +tuner=56 - Philips PAL/SECAM multi (FQ1216AME MK4) +tuner=57 - Philips FQ1236A MK4 +tuner=58 - Ymec TVision TVF-8531MF +tuner=59 - Ymec TVision TVF-5533MF +tuner=60 - Thomson DDT 7611 (ATSC/NTSC) diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/hauppauge-wintv-cx88-ir.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/hauppauge-wintv-cx88-ir.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..93fec32 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/hauppauge-wintv-cx88-ir.txt @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ +The controls for the mux are GPIO [0,1] for source, and GPIO 2 for muting. + +GPIO0 GPIO1 + 0 0 TV Audio + 1 0 FM radio + 0 1 Line-In + 1 1 Mono tuner bypass or CD passthru (tuner specific) + +GPIO 16(i believe) is tied to the IR port (if present). + +------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + +>From the data sheet: + Register 24'h20004 PCI Interrupt Status + bit [18] IR_SMP_INT Set when 32 input samples have been collected over + gpio[16] pin into GP_SAMPLE register. + +What's missing from the data sheet: + +Setup 4KHz sampling rate (roughly 2x oversampled; good enough for our RC5 +compat remote) +set register 0x35C050 to 0xa80a80 + +enable sampling +set register 0x35C054 to 0x5 + +Of course, enable the IRQ bit 18 in the interrupt mask register .(and +provide for a handler) + +GP_SAMPLE register is at 0x35C058 + +Bits are then right shifted into the GP_SAMPLE register at the specified +rate; you get an interrupt when a full DWORD is recieved. +You need to recover the actual RC5 bits out of the (oversampled) IR sensor +bits. (Hint: look for the 0/1and 1/0 crossings of the RC5 bi-phase data) An +actual raw RC5 code will span 2-3 DWORDS, depending on the actual alignment. + +I'm pretty sure when no IR signal is present the receiver is always in a +marking state(1); but stray light, etc can cause intermittent noise values +as well. Remember, this is a free running sample of the IR receiver state +over time, so don't assume any sample starts at any particular place. + +http://www.atmel.com/dyn/resources/prod_documents/doc2817.pdf +This data sheet (google search) seems to have a lovely description of the +RC5 basics + +http://users.pandora.be/nenya/electronics/rc5/ and more data + +http://www.ee.washington.edu/circuit_archive/text/ir_decode.txt +and even a reference to how to decode a bi-phase data stream. + +http://www.xs4all.nl/~sbp/knowledge/ir/rc5.htm +still more info + diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/lifeview.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/lifeview.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b07ea79 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/lifeview.txt @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ +collecting data about the lifeview models and the config coding on +gpio pins 0-9 ... +================================================================== + +bt878: + LR50 rev. Q ("PARTS: 7031505116), Tuner wurde als Nr. 5 erkannt, Eingänge + SVideo, TV, Composite, Audio, Remote. CP9..1=100001001 (1: 0-Ohm-Widerstand + gegen GND unbestückt; 0: bestückt) + +------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + +saa7134: + /* LifeView FlyTV Platinum FM (LR214WF) */ + /* "Peter Missel <peter.missel@onlinehome.de> */ + .name = "LifeView FlyTV Platinum FM", + /* GP27 MDT2005 PB4 pin 10 */ + /* GP26 MDT2005 PB3 pin 9 */ + /* GP25 MDT2005 PB2 pin 8 */ + /* GP23 MDT2005 PB1 pin 7 */ + /* GP22 MDT2005 PB0 pin 6 */ + /* GP21 MDT2005 PB5 pin 11 */ + /* GP20 MDT2005 PB6 pin 12 */ + /* GP19 MDT2005 PB7 pin 13 */ + /* nc MDT2005 PA3 pin 2 */ + /* Remote MDT2005 PA2 pin 1 */ + /* GP18 MDT2005 PA1 pin 18 */ + /* nc MDT2005 PA0 pin 17 strap low */ + + /* GP17 Strap "GP7"=High */ + /* GP16 Strap "GP6"=High + 0=Radio 1=TV + Drives SA630D ENCH1 and HEF4052 A1 pins + to do FM radio through SIF input */ + /* GP15 nc */ + /* GP14 nc */ + /* GP13 nc */ + /* GP12 Strap "GP5" = High */ + /* GP11 Strap "GP4" = High */ + /* GP10 Strap "GP3" = High */ + /* GP09 Strap "GP2" = Low */ + /* GP08 Strap "GP1" = Low */ + /* GP07.00 nc */ diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/not-in-cx2388x-datasheet.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/not-in-cx2388x-datasheet.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..96b638b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/not-in-cx2388x-datasheet.txt @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ +================================================================================= +MO_OUTPUT_FORMAT (0x310164) + + Previous default from DScaler: 0x1c1f0008 + Digit 8: 31-28 + 28: PREVREMOD = 1 + + Digit 7: 27-24 (0xc = 12 = b1100 ) + 27: COMBALT = 1 + 26: PAL_INV_PHASE + (DScaler apparently set this to 1, resulted in sucky picture) + + Digits 6,5: 23-16 + 25-16: COMB_RANGE = 0x1f [default] (9 bits -> max 512) + + Digit 4: 15-12 + 15: DISIFX = 0 + 14: INVCBF = 0 + 13: DISADAPT = 0 + 12: NARROWADAPT = 0 + + Digit 3: 11-8 + 11: FORCE2H + 10: FORCEREMD + 9: NCHROMAEN + 8: NREMODEN + + Digit 2: 7-4 + 7-6: YCORE + 5-4: CCORE + + Digit 1: 3-0 + 3: RANGE = 1 + 2: HACTEXT + 1: HSFMT + +================================================================================= diff --git a/Documentation/w1/w1.generic b/Documentation/w1/w1.generic index eace304..f937fbe 100644 --- a/Documentation/w1/w1.generic +++ b/Documentation/w1/w1.generic @@ -1,19 +1,92 @@ -Any w1 device must be connected to w1 bus master device - for example -ds9490 usb device or w1-over-GPIO or RS232 converter. -Driver for w1 bus master must provide several functions(you can find -them in struct w1_bus_master definition in w1.h) which then will be -called by w1 core to send various commands over w1 bus(by default it is -reset and search commands). When some device is found on the bus, w1 core -checks if driver for it's family is loaded. -If driver is loaded w1 core creates new w1_slave object and registers it -in the system(creates some generic sysfs files(struct w1_family_ops in -w1_family.h), notifies any registered listener and so on...). -It is device driver's business to provide any communication method -upstream. -For example w1_therm driver(ds18?20 thermal sensor family driver) -provides temperature reading function which is bound to ->rbin() method -of the above w1_family_ops structure. -w1_smem - driver for simple 64bit memory cell provides ID reading -method. +The 1-wire (w1) subsystem +------------------------------------------------------------------ +The 1-wire bus is a simple master-slave bus that communicates via a single +signal wire (plus ground, so two wires). + +Devices communicate on the bus by pulling the signal to ground via an open +drain output and by sampling the logic level of the signal line. + +The w1 subsystem provides the framework for managing w1 masters and +communication with slaves. + +All w1 slave devices must be connected to a w1 bus master device. + +Example w1 master devices: + DS9490 usb device + W1-over-GPIO + DS2482 (i2c to w1 bridge) + Emulated devices, such as a RS232 converter, parallel port adapter, etc + + +What does the w1 subsystem do? +------------------------------------------------------------------ +When a w1 master driver registers with the w1 subsystem, the following occurs: + + - sysfs entries for that w1 master are created + - the w1 bus is periodically searched for new slave devices + +When a device is found on the bus, w1 core checks if driver for it's family is +loaded. If so, the family driver is attached to the slave. +If there is no driver for the family, a simple sysfs entry is created +for the slave device. + + +W1 device families +------------------------------------------------------------------ +Slave devices are handled by a driver written for a family of w1 devices. + +A family driver populates a struct w1_family_ops (see w1_family.h) and +registers with the w1 subsystem. + +Current family drivers: +w1_therm - (ds18?20 thermal sensor family driver) + provides temperature reading function which is bound to ->rbin() method + of the above w1_family_ops structure. + +w1_smem - driver for simple 64bit memory cell provides ID reading method. You can call above methods by reading appropriate sysfs files. + + +What does a w1 master driver need to implement? +------------------------------------------------------------------ + +The driver for w1 bus master must provide at minimum two functions. + +Emulated devices must provide the ability to set the output signal level +(write_bit) and sample the signal level (read_bit). + +Devices that support the 1-wire natively must provide the ability to write and +sample a bit (touch_bit) and reset the bus (reset_bus). + +Most hardware provides higher-level functions that offload w1 handling. +See struct w1_bus_master definition in w1.h for details. + + +w1 master sysfs interface +------------------------------------------------------------------ +<xx-xxxxxxxxxxxxx> - a directory for a found device. The format is family-serial +bus - (standard) symlink to the w1 bus +driver - (standard) symlink to the w1 driver +w1_master_attempts - the number of times a search was attempted +w1_master_max_slave_count + - the maximum slaves that may be attached to a master +w1_master_name - the name of the device (w1_bus_masterX) +w1_master_search - the number of searches left to do, -1=continual (default) +w1_master_slave_count + - the number of slaves found +w1_master_slaves - the names of the slaves, one per line +w1_master_timeout - the delay in seconds between searches + +If you have a w1 bus that never changes (you don't add or remove devices), +you can set w1_master_search to a positive value to disable searches. + + +w1 slave sysfs interface +------------------------------------------------------------------ +bus - (standard) symlink to the w1 bus +driver - (standard) symlink to the w1 driver +name - the device name, usually the same as the directory name +w1_slave - (optional) a binary file whose meaning depends on the + family driver + |
